FK  ]RMER-QE-THE-hUR5ERY 


BOX  FURNITURE 

HOW  TO  MAKE  A  HUNDRED 

USEFUL  ARTICLES  FOR 

THE  HOME 


BY 

LOUISE  BRIGHAM 

ILLUSTRATIONS  BY 

EDWARD  H.  ASCHERMAN 

FROM  DESIGNS  BY  THE  AUTHOR 


NEW  YORK 

THE  CENTURY  CO. 
1915 

mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm»mmm*mamm^ 


a  i 


Copyright,  1909,  by 
THE  CENTURY  Co. 


Published  May,  1909 


jX 


•  i 


DEDICATED  TO 

CYNTHIA  P.  LANE 

THE  GOOD  ANGEL  OP  MY  CHILDHOOD 
WHO  BY  HER  NOBLE  EXAMPLE  OP  UN- 
SELFISH LOVE  TO  A  MOTHERLESS  CHILD 
WAS  THE  FIRST  TO  SHOW  ME  THE  JOY 
OP  SERVICE  J  AND  TO 

JACOB  A.  RHS 

WHOSE  BOOK  "HOW  THE  OTHER  HALF 
LIVE"  INFLUENCED  ME  IN  LATER  YEARS 
TO  LEND  A  HAND  TO  THE  FRIENDLESS 


328405 


FOREWORD 

Among  the  many  friends  in  Europe 
and  America  to  whom  my  thoughts 
turn  in  grateful  memory  for  their 
generous  encouragement,  I  mention 
for  especial  thanks  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
William  D.  Munroe,  whose  charming 
hospitality  in  the  Far  North  made 
many  of  these  experiments  possible ; 
Herr  Professor  Josef  Hoffmann,  of 
Die  K.  K.  Kunstgewerbe  Schule,  in 
Vienna;  Miss  Virginia  E.Graeff,  for 
valuable  help  and  suggestions;  and 
to  aU  "The  Givers  of  the  Tool  Chest" 

•••••••«*•••••••••••••»••••• 


•ft ••••••••••••••••••••••••• ••••• 


CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  PAOK 

INTRODUCTORY  CHAPTER 3 

I  THE  BOX  IN  ITS  SIMPLEST  FORM 9 

II  THE  BOX  KEPT  IN  ITS  ORIGINAL  FORM,  WITH 
THE  ADDITION  OF  FALSE  BASES  AND  CORNER 
TRIMS  23 

III  THE    SAME    PRINCIPLES    AS    CHAPTER    II,    WITH 

THE  ADDITION  OF  CIRCULAR  CUTS        ....      39 

IV  THE  BOX  TAKEN   PARTIALLY  APART   SO  THAT  IT 

LOSES  ITS  ORIGINAL  SHAPE 55 

v  COMBINATIONS  OF  CHAPTER  IV 67 

vi  LARGER  BOXES,  APPLYING  THE  SAME  OR  SIMILAR 

PRINCIPLES  AS  IN  CHAPTER  V 87 

VII    THE    BOX    TURNED    UPON    ITS    SIDE,    WITH    THE 

COVER  AND  SOMETIMES  THE  SIDES  REMOVED     .    107 

VIII    ONE  OR  MORE  BOXES  SUPPORTED  ONE  ABOVE  THE 

OTHER  BY  EITHER  CORNER  TRIM  OR  LEGS     .      .    133 

ix  THREE  OR  MORE  BOXES  USED  IN  SIMPLE  COMBI- 
NATION      155 

X  THE  BOX  TAKEN  PARTLY  OR  ENTIRELY  APART 

AND  THE  MATERIAL  USED  IN  CONSTRUCTION    .  177 

XI  MORE    ELABORATE    COMBINATIONS    OF    THE    AR- 

TICLES IN  THE  PREVIOUS  CHAPTERS  AND  WITH 
LARGER  AND  A  GREATER  NUMBER  OF  BOXES  .       .211 

XII     THE    SAME   PRINCIPLES  AS    CHAPTER   XI,   WITH 

THE  ADDITION  OF  FRAMEWORK 247 


•• *mm mmmmmmmmmm »m*mmm **mmmm ••••••••••• 


LIST  OF  INTERIORS 
Nursery Frontispiece 

PAGE 

"Den" i  .     .  10 

Living-room II  .     .  24 

Twin-bed  Room in  .     .  40 

College  Boy's  Corner iv  .     .  56 

Kitchen v  .     .  68 

Office vi  ..  38 

Boy's  Room vn  .     .  108 

School-room vm  .     .  134 

Bedroom ix  .     .  156 

Studio x  .     .  178 

Invalid's  Room xi  .     .  212 

Dining-room xn  .     .  248 

Club-room xm  .     .  294 

Library  or  Study xiv  .     .  296 


mm*  ••••••••••••••••») 


•mmmmmmmmmmmmmmm •••••• •••••••••••••••• 


LIST  OF  SUBJECTS 

NUMBER  PAGE 

1  Plant -box,  2 13 

2  Child's  Bed-steps,  1    . 14 

3  Cast  Pedestal,  1 16 

4  Vine  Vase,  2 18 

5  Cane  and  Golf -stick  Stand,  1 19 

6  Vine  or  Branch  Pedestal,  3 21 

7  Miniature  Plant-box,  1 27 

8  Jardiniere,  2 28 

9  Scrap-basket,  1 30 

10  Scrap-box,  1 32 

11  Kitchen  Stool,  1 33 

12  Hanging  Flower-box,  2 34 

13  Perforated  Scrap-box,  1 36 

14  Hanging  Lantern,  1 37 

15  Footstool,  1.     Child's  Stool.    Club-room  Stool    .     .  43 

16  Coal-  or  Paper-box,  2 45 

17  Blacking-box,  1 47 

18  Oblong  Clock  Case,  1 49 

19  Upright  Clock  Case,  1 51 

20  Nursery  Clock  Case,  1 53 

21  Small  Wall  Eack,   2 59 

22  Wall  Bracket,  2 61 

23  Vase  Wall  Bracket,  1 63 

24  Kitchen  Spice-box,  1 64 

25  Pipe  Rack,  1 65 

26  Housewife 's  Handy  Rack  No.  1,  2 66 

27  Kitchen  Comfort,  2 71 

28  Double  Wall  Rack,  1 72 

29  Large  Wall  Book  Rack,  1.    Broom  Shelf  ....  73 

30  Wall  Book  and  Knickknack  Bracket,  2 75 

31  Housewife's  Handy  Rack  No.  2,  2 78 


^ 


u< 


NUMBER  PAGE 

32  Magazine  Rack,  1 80 

33  Shoe  Cupboard,  2 82 

34  Housewife's  Handy  Rack  No  3,  2 84 

35  Flower-stand,  1 91 

36  Soiled-linen    Receiver,    1 93 

37  Shirt-waist  Closet,  2 95 

38  ' l  Notionette, "  2 97 

39  Office  Washstand,  2 99 

40  Desk  Chair,  2 101 

41  Quadruple  Writing-desk,  1 103 

42  Fireplace  Bookcase,  2 112 

43  Simple  Bookcase,  2 114 

44  Music-stand,    1 116 

45  Office  File,  1 118 

46  500-volume  Bookcase,  1 120 

47  Bookcase  with  Drawers,  1 123 

48  Boy's  Book-  and  Game-table,  1 125 

49  Wall  Desk,  1 127 

50  Bookcase  Desk,  2 129 

51  Odds-and-ends  Stand,  1 137 

52  Rolling  Soiled-dish  Stand,  2.     Smoker's  Table  .     .  138 

53  Flower-  and  Book-stand,  2 140 

54  Bedside  Stand,  1 142 

55  "Silverette,"  1 144 

56  Game-table,  3.    Toy  Cupboard 146 

57  Twin-bed  Night  Table,  2 149 

58  Nature-study  Stand,  1     • 151 

59  Photographic-material  Stand,  2 159 

60  Reference  Stand,  1 161 

61  Child's  Clothes-press,  1 163 

62  Umbrella-  and  Overshoe-stand,  1 166 

63  Chafing-dish  Table,  2 168 

64  Washstand,  2 171 

65  Octagon  Nursery  Table,  2 174 

66  Kettle-  and  Cover-holder,  1 .     .     .182 

67  Nest  of  Benches  for  Kindergarten  and  Settlement,  1  184 

68  Table  Bookstand,  2 186 

••••••••••••••••••••••••ft** 


••••••• mmmmmmmmmmmmm* •••••• ••••••••••• 

NUMBER  .  PAGE 

69  Firewood  or  Newspaper  Eaek,  1 188 

70  Dressing-table    Chair,     1.      Baby's    High    Chair. 

Child's  Chair 190 

71  Flag  Wall  Rack,  2 192 

72  Picture  Frame  No.  1,1 195 

73  Mirror  Frame,  1 197 

74  Picture  Frame  No.  2,  1 198 

75  "Dresserette,"  2 199 

76  Greek-cross  Tea-table,  2 202 

77  Child's  Bedstead,  1 205 

78  Invalid's  Bed-table,  1 207 

79  Teacher's  Desk,  1 216 

80  Boy 's  Work-table,  1.     Kitchen  Table 219 

81  Window-seat,  2 221 

82  Bedroom  Window-seat,  2 224 

83  College  Corner  Seat,  2 228 

84  Single  Wardrobe,  1 230 

85  Double  Wardrobe,  1 233 

86  Spitzbergen  Sideboard,  2 234 

87  Allendale  Sideboard,  2 238 

88  Copenhagen  Sideboard,  2 242 

89  Corner  Washstand,  1 252 

90  Combination  Washstand  and  Wardrobe,  1  ....  255 

91  "  Shavingette, "  2 256 

92  Triple-mirror  Dressing-table,  3 259 

93  Dressing-table,   2 262 

94  Washstand  and  Dresser,  2 265 

95  Child 's  Washstand  and  Dresser,  1 269 

96  China  Closet,  1 272 

97  Hall  Stand,  2 276 

98  Boy's  Delight,  1 280 

99  Club-room  Corner  Seat,  2 282 

100  Combination  Desk,  Reading-table,  and  Bookcase,  2    .  289 


••••••••••••••a* * ••••« • mwmmmmmmmmmmm 99 


•*•*»••••»••••••••••••••••••••«» 

ALPHABETICAL  INDEX 

PAGE 

Allendale  Sideboard 238 

Baby 's  High  Chair 190 

Bedroom  Window-seat 224 

Bedside  Stand 142 

Blacking-box 47 

Bookcase  Desk 129 

Bookcase  with  Drawers 123 

Boy 's  Book-  and  Game-table 125 

Boy's  Delight 280 

Boy's    Work-table 219 

Broom   Shelf 74 

Cane  and  Golf -stick  Stand 19 

Cast  Pedestal 16 

Chafing-dish  Table 168 

Child's  Bedstead      .     .     .     . 205 

Child's    Bed-steps 14 

Child 's  Chair 190 

Child 's   Clothes-press 163 

Child's  Stool 44 

Child  's  Washstand  and  Dresser 269 

China  Closet 272 

Club-room  Corner  Seat 282 

Club-room  Stool 44 

Coal-  or  Paper-box 45 

College  Corner  Seat 228 

Combination  Desk,  Eeading-table,  and  Bookcase  .     .     .  289 

Combination  Washstand  and  Wardrobe 255 

Copenhagen   Sideboard 242 

Corner  Washstand 252 

Desk  Chair 101 

Double  Wall  Back 72 

Double  Wardrobe 233 

"Dresserette" 199 

Dressing-table 262 

Dressing-table  Chair 190 

•  ••••  ••••••••••••••»oa<»*»»tt«««f« 


•mmmmmmmmmmmmmm ••••••• ••••••••••«•••• 

p 

PAGE 

Fireplace  Bookcase 112 

Firewood  or  Newspaper  Back 188 

500-volume   Bookcase 120 

Flag  Wall  Eack 192 

Flower-  and  Book-stand 140 

Flower-stand 91 

Footstool 43 

Game-table 146 

Greek-cross  Tea-table 202 

Hall  Stand 276 

Hanging    Flower-box 34 

Hanging  Lantern 37 

Housewife's  Handy  Eack  No.  1 66 

Housewife 's  Handy  Eack  No.  2 78 

Housewife 's  Handy  Eack  No.  3 84 

Invalid's  Bed-table 207 

Jardiniere 28 

Kettle-  and  Cover-holder .182 

Kitchen  Comfort 71 

Kitchen   Spice-box 64 

Kitchen  Stool 33 

Kitchen  Table 219 

Large  Wall  Book  Eack 73 

Magazine   Eack 80 

Miniature  Plant-box 27 

Mirror  Frame 197 

Music-stand 116 

Nature-study   Stand 151 

Nest  of  Benches  for  Kindergarten  and  Settlement  .     .  184 

Newspaper  Eack 188 

< '  Notionette  " 97 

Nursery  Clock  Case 53 

Oblong  Clock  Case 49 

Octagon  Nursery  Table 174 

Odds-and-ends   Stand 137 

Office  File 118 

Office  Washstand 99 

••••••••••••• •••••••••  •••••••••••••• 9 


••••••••••••••••••••••••••MB ••• 

PAGE 

Perforated  Scrap-box 36 

Photographic-Material  Stand 159 

Picture  Frame  No.  1 195 

Picture  Frame  No.  2 198 

Pipe  Eack 65 

Plant-box 13 

Quadruple   Writing-desk 103 

Reference  Stand  .     .    „ 161 

Rolling  Soiled-dish  Stand 138 

Scrap-basket 30 

Scrap-box 32 

1 '  Shavingette  " 256 

Shirt-waist  Closet 95 

Shoe  Cupboard 82 

"Silverette" 144 

Simple  Bookcase 114 

Single  Wardrobe „     .     .  230 

Small  Wall  Rack 59 

Smoker's  Table 139 

Soiled-linen   Receiver 93 

Spitzbergen  Sideboard 234 

Table   Bookstand 186 

Teacher's  Desk 216 

Toy  Cupboard 148 

Triple-mirror  Dressing-table 259 

Twin-bed  Night  Table 149 

Umbrella-  and  Overshoe-stand 166 

Upright  Clock  Case 51 

Vase  Wall  Bracket 63 

Vine  or  Branch  Pedestal 21 

Vine  Vase 18 

Wall  Book  and  Knickknack  Bracket 75 

Wall  Bracket  ,     .     , 61 

Wall  Desk  .     .     , 127 

Washstand 171 

Washstand  and  Dresser 265 

Window-seat 221 

!••• • ••••••••••••••• mmmwmmm mm •• 


i» 


PREFACE 

Two  summers  on  the  island  of  Spitzbergen  taught 
me,  more  than  all  previous  experiments,  the  latent 
possibilities  of  a  box. 

Our  camp  was  located  seven  hundred  miles 
north  of  the  Arctic  Circle ;  Hammerf est,  Norway, 
five  hundred  and  thirty-five  miles  to  the  southeast, 
was  the  nearest  point  from  which  supplies  could 
be  obtained.  Ice  and  snow  cut  off  the  settlement 
from  the  outside  world  for  eight  months  of  the 
year.  The  provisions  and  other  equipment  neces- 
sary for  the  camp  of  eighty  miners  and  workmen 
had  to  be  carried  in  boxes  on  the  ships  that  came 
from  the  mainland  during  the  four  summer 
months.  When  the  portable  house  which  was  to  be 
the  home  of  the  manager,  his  wife,  and  myself  as 
their  guest,  had  been  put  up  and  the  supplies  un- 
packed, the  boxes  began  to  accumulate. 

Here  was  an  opportunity  for  putting  to  a  prac- 
tical test  previous  experiments  in  the  making  of 
' '  box  furniture. ' '  I  asked  my  host  to  give  me  the 
privilege  of  showing  how  these  "odds  and  ends," 
usually  considered  worthless,  could  be  utilized  in 
making  attractive  furnishings  for  a  comfortable 
home.  No  lumber  was  available  in  Spitzbergen, 
for,  though  we  found  during  the  short  summer  a 
beautiful  arctic  flora  and  "famine  bread"  (the 

£*••• •••»•••••••••••••«•••••*••• 


immmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm* 

9 

edible  moss  often  used  by  explorers),  the  "polar 
willow,"  growing  but  two  inches  in  height,  was 
our  only  tree. 

Cut  off  from  other  materials,  the  possibilities  of 
the  box  seemed  greater  than  ever,  and  the  work, 
which  daily  grew  in  interest,  was  commenced.  As 
I  worked  in  that  far-off  marvelous  land  of  con- 
tinuous day,  surrounded  by  mountains  and  gla- 
ciers, I  felt  anew  the  truth,  so  familiar  to  all,  that 
work  to  be  of  real  value  must  be  honest,  useful, 
and  beautiful,  and  Ruskin  and  Morris  spoke  as 
clearly  in  the  arctic  regions  as  in  the  settlements 
or  studio  in  New  York. 

A  pleasing  incident  of  that  summer  occurred 
when  we  welcomed  some  members  of  the  Walter 
Wellman  exploring  expedition  who  came  to  pay 
us  a  visit.  One  of  the  explorers,  noting  our  com- 
fortable little  cottage  with  its  attractive  box  fur- 
niture, turned  to  my  hostess  and  said :  "You  have 
the  northernmost  civilized  home  in  the  world,  for 
though  our  camp  is  one  hundred  miles  nearer  the 
pole,  yet  we  have  no  woman  there  to  grace  it,  and 
without  her  there  can  be  no  home."  In  many 
other  homes  the  box  has  been  found  most  useful, 
and  its  great  value  as  an  educational  force  I  wish 
here  to  note. 

The  Prince  of  Monaco,  who  visited  our  arctic 
home,  seemed  as  much  pleased  as  the  Danish  peas- 
ant who  watched  by  the  work-bench.  Among  the 
most  enthusiastic  admirers  to  be  found  of  "the 
possibilities  of  a  box"  are  the  bishop,  the  mayor, 


the  bank  president,  the  capitalist,  and  the  profes- 
sor, while  the  elevator  boy,  the  scrubwoman,  and 
the  working  man  have  shown  equal  enthusiasm. 

One  feature  that  gave  constant  stimulus  to  the 
work  was  the  friendly  interest  shown  by  people  of 
different  conditions  and  nationalities. 

In  the  teaching  of  manual  training  the  carefully 
prepared  material  given  to  the  children  often  has 
a  tendency  to  make  them  rely  too  much  on  exter- 
nals. If  the  pupils  could  be  encouraged  to  supple- 
ment their  schoorwork  with  materials  found  in 
the  home,  they  would  find  near  at  hand  a  practical 
opportunity  for  creative  activity  and  the  working 
out  of  educational  principles.  What  better  oppor- 
tunity for  such  uses  can  be  furnished  than  by  the 
box  as  found  in  or  near  every  household  ?  Here  is 
an  often  neglected  opportunity  for  the  transfor- 
mation of  humble  and  despised  material  into  ob- 
jects of  beauty  and  usefulness  for  the  home. 

Besides  the  educational  and  artistic  values 
found  in  such  work,  there  is  also  a  wide  economic 
significance  in  the  use  of  the  box.  It  is  said  that 
an  American  household  throws  away  after  one 
meal  sufficient  food  to  provide  three  meals  for  a 
French  peasant  family. 

Boxes  cost  almost  nothing,  and  so  serve  a  valu- 
able end  as  illustrative  material  for  school  and 
other  experiments. 

Though  the  economic  value  of  the  box  and  its 
especial  adaptability  for  school  and  social  work 
have  been  mentioned,  experiment  has  proved  that 

••• ••»»••••••••*§•••*•••»•«•••• 


••••••• mmmmmmmmm •••••• •••••••••••••••• 

it  can  be  used  with  artistic  effect  in  the  homes  of 
wealth  and  culture. 

The  ideas  in  this  little  book  have  either  been 
presented  in  theory  or  illustrated  by  practice  in 
Spitzbergen,  England,  Norway,  Sweden,  Holland, 
and  Germany,  in  the  Social  Settlement  of  Copen- 
hagen, Denmark,  in  the  Sunshine  Cottages  (the 
model  homes  where  I  lived  in  the  foreign  districts 
of  Cleveland),  in  the  studio  as  well  as  a  working 
man's  flat  in  New  York,  in  the  Elizabeth  Peabody 
House,  Boston,  a  vacation  home  for  girls  in  Con- 
necticut, and  in  the  Bradley  Republic  "Allen- 
dale,"  near  Chicago,  as  well  as  in  a  five-room 
apartment  (my  own  home)  which  is  being  furnished 
as  this  book  goes  to  the  press.  This  is  an  apart- 
ment in  a  tenement  on  the  East  Side  of  New  York 
City,  with  the  typical  kitchen,  dining-room,  two 
bedrooms,  and  a  living-room,  the  second  bedroom 
being  used  as  a  studio  where  furniture  and  cur- 
tains are  actually  created  on  the  work-bench  and 
loom  at  small  cost,  showing  how  the  needs  of  a 
home  may  be  practically  and  artistically  met  at  a 
minimum  expense  through  the  utilization  of  the 
cast-off. 

The  suggestions  here  given  are  not  only  appli- 
cable for  the  uses  already  noted,  but  box  furniture 
finds  its  happiest  expression  where  limitations  of 
space  have  to  be  considered.  So  the  hall  bedroom, 
the  camp,  the  winter  dwelling,  the  summer  cottage, 
the  steamer,  the  city  office,  the  kindergarten  and 
school-room,  and  even  the  foreign  mission  can  be 


fitted  up  admirably  in  this  way,  and  the  furniture 
in  each  instance  can  be  mated  to  the  waiting  space 
with  a  minimum  of  expense.  As  its  practical  value 
has  been  proved  in  both  the  Old  and  the  New 
World  alike,  it  is  with  the  hope  that  the  sugges- 
tions offered  may  be  utilized  by  other  workers  in 
the  home,  be  it  rich  or  poor.  To  all  who  care  for 
simplicity  and  thrift,  utility  and  beauty,  I  send 
my  message. 


t  •• 


BOX  FURNITURE 


BOX  FURNITURE 


INTRODUCTORY  CHAPTER 

A  WORD  BEFORE  BEGINNING 

To  avoid  repetition  in  the  descriptions,  directions 
applying  in  common  to  all  the  various  articles  are  here 
given,  together  with  a  few  brief  hints  to  help  make  the 
way  smooth. 

SELECTION  OF  THE  BOX 

The  appearance  of  the  completed  articles  made  from 
the  various  boxes  called  for  in  this  book  will  depend 
very  much  upon  one's  ability  to  obtain  boxes  that  are 
in  good  condition.  Therefore,  select  the  best,  discarding 
those  that  are  out  of  shape  and  have  serious  blemishes, 
such  as  brands  burned  on  their  surface,  knotholes,  or 
other  serious  defects  which  will  be  difficult  to  obliterate. 
Many  boxes  are  now  made  having  "dovetailed"  corners. 
If  a  side  or  an  end  is  to  be  removed,  this  kind  of  box 
must  be  rejected. 

SIZE  OF  THE  BOX 

The  size  given  in  the  requirements  is  the  actual  out- 
side dimensions  of  the  box  named.  A  box  of  equal  size 


.  FUKN1TURE 

under  another  name  (and  there  are  many,  as  boxes  of 
every  imaginable  size  and  shape  are  made)  will  generally 
do  quite  as  well,  and  in  many  instances  boxes  not  the 
exact  size  specified,  but  nearly  so,  can  be  used.  The  size 
called  for,  however,  is  about  the  size  necessary  to  obtain 
the  proper  proportion  of  the  article  to  be  made. 


DISJOINTING  THE  BOX 

When  the  box  is  to  be  partially  or  entirely  taken 
apart,  first  remove  the  cover,  then  loosen  the  joints 
slightly  by  gently  tapping  on  the  inside  close  to  the  joint 
to  be  severed  until  the  nails  are  "started."  Then  tap 
the  side  or  bottom  (as  the  case  may  be),  and  from  the 
outside  withdraw  the  nail  with  the  hammer  claw.  The 
box  will  readily  come  apart  if  both  the  cover  and  the 
bottom  are  removed. 

It  is  sometimes  necessary  to  take  the  box  entirely 
apart,  and  plane  its  sections  in  order  to  remove  serious 
blemishes  and  enhance  its  appearance,  and  put  it  to- 
gether again.  If  the  box  is  to  be  used  with  the  side  or 
end  removed,  it  is  better  to  withdraw  too  many  rather 
than  too  few  nails.  Then  close  up  and  re-nail  the  joints 
and  fasten  the  caver  on  again. 

CORNER  TRIM  AND  LEGS 

The  method  of  making  the  corner  trim  and  legs  is  the 
same  for  all  the  articles.  They  ^  are  always 
made  of  a  narrow  and  a  wider  I  jFji^jffi*  strip  nailed 
together  to  form  a  right  angle  'J  |  (regardless 

of  their  length,  although  size  of  i-IB  material 


BOX  FUBNITUBE  5 

called  for  varies),  each  side  of  the  angle  measuring  alike. 
In  joining  them  together,  use  small  nails  or  large  brads 
\y2  inches  long,  driven  about  4  inches  apart. 

NAILING 

When  nailing  together  the  various  parts,  it  is  well  to 
drive  the  nails  so  that  their  points  will  remain  hidden. 
In  joining  boxes,  the  nails  are  driven  from  the  inside  of 
one  box  through  its  side,  end,  or  bottom  ( as  the  case  may 
be),  into  and  through  the  abutting  portion  of  the  adjoin- 
ing box.  Use  nails  of  the  right  length  to  project  ys  of 
an  inch  or  more  inside  of  the  latter  box,  where  the 
points  should  be  bent  over  at  a  right  angle,  which  is 
termed  "clinching  the  nail."  The  size  of  the  nails  for 
the  various  pieces  and  the  distance  apart  they  should  be 
spaced  must  be  a  matter  of  individual  judgment  of  the 
worker;  generally  speaking,  however,  a  nail  having  a 
length  equal  to  the  combined  thickness  of  the  parts  to 
be  joined  is  sufficient,  unless  allowance  is  to  be  made  for 
clinching.  Use  brads  when  possible,  or  wire  nails  with 
small  heads,  and  with  a  nail-set  and  hammer  drive  their 
heads  slightly  below  the  surface  in  order  that  they  may 
show  very  little  or  be  entirely  hidden. 


FINISHING  TOUCHES 

Select  good  covers  for  the  doors  or  lids,  and  smooth  the 
edges  and  surfaces  of  each  article  by  planing,  scraping, 
and  sandpapering.  All  objectionable  nail-holes  near  the 
edges  and  any  similar  defects  may  be  filled  with  a  mix- 
ture of  putty  and  sawdust  or  pegs  of  wood  driven  in 


6  BOX  FURNITURE 

and  trimmed  off  even  with  the  surface.  Pure  putty  will 
not  absorb  stain,  therefore  add  as  much  sawdust  as  the 
putty  will  hold. 

Spools  sawed  in  half  and  screwed  on  make  very  good 
home-made  knobs.  Serviceable  buttons  for  the  doors 
can  be  easily  made  of  wood  if  desired.  The  prepared 
paints  and  varnishes  sold  in  most  of  the  paint-stores 
make  an  excellent  finish.  Flat  stains  of  the  dark  hues 
are  also  very  good,  but  the  light  ones  are  too  trans- 
parent and  will  not  cover  well. 

DECORATION 

The  simple  motifs  shown  in  the  several  interiors  are  an 
adaptation  of  the  "Hoffmann  method"  of  utilizing  the 
square  as  the  basic  principle  in  decoration.  They  are 
shown  in  combinations  of  two  or  more  squares,  or  parts 
of  the  same,  as  in  the  Nursery  Interior.  This  method 
makes  it  possible  to  have  attractive  rooms  decorated  in 
a  simple  manner  without  any  especial  art  training.  It 
may  be  so  applied  that  nail-heads  and  other  imperfec- 
tions will  be  less  conspicuous,  as  shown  in  the  Kitchen 
Interior.  It  may  also  be  effectively  woven  into  rugs, 
appliqued  or  stenciled  on  the  table-covers  and  hangings, 
and  stenciled  on  the  side  walls. 


TOOLS 

The  hammer  is  the  most  useful  of  all  the  tools  required, 
therefore  get  a  good  one,  a  carpenter's  claw-hammer, 
selecting  one  with  a  claw  that  will  draw  nails  that  project 
but  slightly  above  the  surface.  The  tools  necessary  to 


BOX  FURNITURE 


make  the  simple  articles  are  named  first,  and  others  may 
be  added  from  time  to  time,  as  the  opportunity  offers : 


1  Three-foot  Folding  Rule 

1  Adz -eye  Claw-hammer,  16  oz. 

(Hammond 's  No.  3) 
1  Cross-cut  Saw,  20  in. 
1  Rip-saw,  20  in. 
1  Stanley  Iron  Block  Plane, 

No.  9% 

1  Brad-hammer,  4  oz. 
1  Drawing-knife,  8  in.  blade 

1  Hardened-blade  Try-square, 

10  in. 

2  Firmer-chisels,  %  in.  and  %  in. 

(Buck  Bros. 'No.  2) 
2  Firmer  gouges,  *4  in.  and  %  in. 
1  Sloyd  Knife,  No.  7 


1  Brace,  8  in.  (Barber 's  No.  223) 
3  Auger-bits,  ^  in.,  %  in.,  and 

lin.  (Russell  Jennings') 
1  Iron  Pad  Keyhole-saw,  No.  2 
1  Pair  Winged  Dividers,  6  in. 
1  Handled  Brad-awl,  1%  in. 
1  Round  Knurled  Nail-set,  -fa  ia. 

cap 
1  Stanley  Iron  Smooth  Plane, 

No.  3 
1  Round  Hickory  Mallet,  No.  4 

1  India  Oil-stone,  No.  29,  in  Iron 

Box 

2  Screw-drivers,  3  in.  and  8  in. 
1  Beech  Miter-box,  18  in.  long 


NOTE.  As  boxes  of  the  same  make  and  kind  vary 
slightly  in  size,  and  as  boxes  other  than  those  specified, 
but  of  nearly  the  same  size,  may  be  selected,  it  is  deemed 
wiser  to  make  no  attempt  to  state  in  figures  absolute  di- 
mensions for  the  material  (other  than  the  boxes  called 
for)  under  the  head  of  requirements  for  each  illustration. 


CHAPTER  I 
THE  BOX  IN  ITS  SIMPLEST  FORM 


H 
I* 


Gbe  "Den" 


NATURE-STUDY  STAND  JARDINIERE 

FIREPLACE  BOOKCASE          SCRAP-BOX 

CANE  AND  GOLF-STICK  STAND 

SMOKER'S  TABLE 


!• 

• 


|« 
|i 
I* 
!• 


I- 
!• 


I* 

h 
I* 


Color  Scheme: 

Dark  mahogany  (deep  red). 
Light  buff. 

Woodwork : 

Dark  mahogany. 

Furniture : 

Dark  mahogany. 

Walls: 

Light  buff,  with  motif   stenciled  in   same   color   as 
furniture. 

Ceiling : 

Buff  in  lighter  tone  than  the  walls. 

Hangings,  Pillows,  and  Window-seat  Cover: 

Homespun  in  natural  linen  color,  with  motif  stenciled 
in  mahogany  tones. 

Curtains  : 

Deep  cream  fish-net,  with  motif  woven  or  embroid- 
ered in  heavy  floss  of  mahogany  colors. 

Floor : 

Painted  same  color  as  furniture,  with  jute  rugs  of 
natural  color,  and  mahogany  shades  in  the  border. 

Plants : 

Growing  plants  or  cut  flowers  with  yellow,  orange,  or 
red  blossoms. 


'^WT~?"?"?"T~T"T~T  TTTTTTTTTT 

CHAPTER  I 


Illustration  1 

PLANT-BOX 

Box  with  cover  removed,  otherwise  left  intact. 


.  Illustration  2 


CHILD'S  BED-STEPS 


Three  boxes  placed  top  side  up;  two  have  covers  re- 
moved and  hinged  as  lids,  otherwise  left  intact. 


Illustration  3 


CAST  PEDESTAL, 


Box  placed  on  end,  otherwise  left  intact.    False  bottom 
'"     and  false  top  added. 


»•     Illustration  4 


VINE  VASE 


Box  placed  on  end ;  cover  removed,  otherwise  left  in- 
tact.   False  base  added. 


Illustration  5 


CANE  AND  GOLF-STICK  STAND 

on  end;  top  end  removed,  otl 
tact.    Facing  strips  and  two  false  bases  added. 

Illustration  6 


Box  placed  on  end;  top  end  removed,  otherwise  left  in- 
Facii 


VINE  OR  BRANCH  PEDESTAL 

Box  placed  on  end ;  top  end  removed  and  used  as  shelf, 
otherwise  left  intact.    False  base  and  facing  strips  added. 


•I 
•I 
•I 
•I 
•I 


•I 
•I 
•I 
•I 
•I 
•I 
•I 
•I 
•I 
•I 
•I 
•I 
•I 
•I 
•I 
•I 

M 


BOX  FURNITURE 


13 


PLANT-BOX 


Illustration  1 


Figures  1  and  2 


Requirements  : 

Body.     1  Bottled-bean  Box  (about  7%  in.  deep,  11%  in.  wide, 
in.  long). 


Construction  : 

Remove  the  cover  carefully  from  the  box  and  fill  all 
nail-holes  or  other  imperfections  with  putty  or  wooden 
pegs,  and  stain  or  paint.  When  thoroughly  dry,  a  design 
or  motif  may  be  painted  or  stenciled  in  oil  color  on  the 
sides. 


14 


BOX  FURNITURE 


CHILD'S  BED-STEPS 


Illustration  2 


Figure  1 


Requirements  : 

Body.     3  Canned-  fruit  Boxes  (about  10  in.  deep,  9  in.  wide,  14 
in.  long). 

Hardware.     4  1%  in.  brass  butts  and  screws. 


Construction  : 

Remove  the  covers  from  two  of  the  boxes.  Saw  a  strip 
2  inches,  wide,  the  length  of  the  cover,  from  each  cover. 
Set  -these  strips  or  portions  of  covers  in  their  original 
positions  on.  the  tops  of  the  boxes  and  nail  them.  Hang 
the  balance  of  .each  cover  to  these  strips  with  1%  inch 
butts,  laying  them  flat  on  the  top  face  or  placing  them 
in  the  joint  between  the  cover  and  the  strip,  if  you  prefer, 
and  place  the  butts  about  2  inches  from  each  end  of  the 
box. 


BOX  FUENITUKE  15 

Nail  the  cover  tightly  on  the  third  box  and  place  it  on 
the  floor,  top  side  up.  Set  one  of  the  other  boxes  upon  it 
with  its  cover  side  up  and  nail  them  together.  Turn  them 
on  their  sides  and  place  the  other  hinged-cover  box  upon 
the  side  of  the  third  box,  or  the  box  from  which  the 
cover  was  not  removed,  and  nail  them  together.  Turn 
them  flat  side  down  on  the  floor  and  they  will  be  ready 
to  use  as  steps  and  for  holding  shoes  and  stockings. 


16 


BOX  FUENITUEB 


CAST  PEDESTAL 


Illustration  3 


Figure  1 


Requirements: 

Body.    1  Silk  Box  (about  7  in.  square,  35  in.  long). 
Top.      1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  square  2  in.  greater  than  the  box. 
Base.     1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  square  2%  in.  greater  than  the  box. 
1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  square  4  in.  greater  than  the  box. 

Construction : 

Place  the  box  on  end  with  the  bottom  end  up.  Set  the 
2y2  inch  greater  square  upon  it,  allowing  its  edges  to 
project  evenly  all  around,  and  nail  in  place.  Upon  this 
square  set  the  larger  square,  allowing  it  to  project 
evenly,  and  nail  it  to  the  smaller  square.  This  forms  the 
base  for  the  pedestal.  Turn  it  upside  down  and  stand 
it  upon  the  base,  then  set  the  top  on  and  nail  it,  allowing 
it  to  project  evenly  all  around. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


17 


NOTE.  As  it  may  be  difficult  to  obtain  a  silk  box  in 
some  remote  places,  the  body  of  a  box  without  ends  can 
be  made  from  part  of  a  packing  box  that  is  35  inches  or 
more  long,  by  making  four  pieces  y2  inch  thick,  6^2 
inches  wide,  and  35  inches  long.  Put  the  body  pieces 
together  in  such  a  way  that  one  edge  of  each  side  will 
butt  against  and  the  other  edge  will  lap  over  its  adjoin- 
ing side,  thus : 


18 


BOX  FURNITURE 


VINE  VASE 


Illustration  4 


Figures  1  and  2 


Requirements : 

Body.    1  Bottle  Box  (about  4  in.  square,  8  in.  long). 
Base.    1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  square  3  in.  greater  than  box. 


Construction : 

Remove  the  cover.  Turn  the  box  bottom  up  and  set 
and  nail  the  base  upon  it,  allowing  the  edges  of  the 
base  to  project  l1/^  inches  on  all  sides. 

NOTE.  This  Vine  Vase  is  extremely  attractive  when 
used  collectively,  as  shown  in  the  Dining-room  Interior, 
where  five  are  in  the  window. 


BOX  FUENITUBE 


19 


CANE  AND  GOLF-STICK  STAND 

Illustration  5 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.    1  Silk  Box  (about  7  in.  square,  35  in.  long). 

Base.     1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  square  2%  in.  greater  than  the  box. 

1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  square  4  in.  greater  than  the  box. 
Facing  Strips.     4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1*4  in.  wide,  and  length 
equal  to  the  side  of  the  square  of  the  box. 

Construction : 

Remove  the  cover  or  top  end.  Place  the  box  on  end 
with  the  bottom  end  up.  Set  the  2%  inch  greater  square 
piece  upon  it,  allowing  its  edges  to  project  evenly  all 
around,  and  nail  in  place.  Upon  this  square  set  the 


20  BOX  FURNITURE 

larger  square,  allowing  it  to  project  evenly,  and  nail  it 
to  the  smaller  square.  This  forms  the  base  of  the  pedes- 
tal. Turn  it  upside  down  and  stand  it  upon  the  base. 
For  the  top  finish,  use  the  four  facing  strips  to  form  the 
square  which  surmounts  the  top.  Nail  each  strip  on  the 
top  edge  of  the  pedestal,  allowing  one  end  and  one  side 
of  the  strip  to  project  %  of  an  inch  over  the  face  of  the 
pedestal.  The  other  end  of  the  strip  will  butt  against 
the  side  of  the  next  strip  on  the  adjoining  side. 


BOX  FUBNITUEE 


VINE  OR  BRANCH  PEDESTAL 


Illustration  6 


Figures  1,  2,  and  3 


Requirements : 

The  same  as  for  the  Cane  and  Golf -stick  Stand,  Illustration  No. 
5,  with  the  following  addition: 

Shelf.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  width  and  length  to  fit  inside  size 
of  the  box. 


Construction : 

The  same  as  for  Illustration  No.  5.  Then  place  the 
shelf  inside  the  pedestal,  8  inches  from  the  top  end,  and 
nail  through  into  its  edges  from  the  outside  with 
inch  brads. 


BOX  FURNITUKE 


CHAPTER  H 

THE  BOX  KEPT  IN  ITS  ORIGINAL  FORM  WITH  THE 
ADDITION  OP  FALSE  BASES  AND  CORNER  TRIMS 


living  IRoom 


HANGING  FLOWER-BOXES  PLANT-BOX 

DOUBLE  WALL  RACK 
MAGAZINE  RACK  PICTURE  FRAME  NO.  I 

BOOKCASE  WITH  DRAWERS 
SCRAP-BASKET     OBLONG  CLOCK  CASE 

Color  Scheme  : 
Black. 
White. 
Crimson. 

Woodwork: 

Black  paint. 

Furniture: 

Black  paint. 

Walls: 

White,  with  motif  stenciled  in  black. 

Ceiling  : 
White. 

Hangings  and  Chair  Pillows  : 

Canvas  in  rich  crimson  (not  deep  red). 

Curtains  : 

White  muslin,  with  motif  embroidered  in  black. 

Floor: 

Painted  black,  with  rugs  of  crimson  tones. 


Plants: 


Vines,  cut  flowers,  and  growing  plants  with  crimson 
or  white  blossoms. 


CHAPTER  II 

Illustration  7 

MINIATURE   PLANT-BOX 

Box  placed  top  side  up;  cover  removed,  otherwise  left 
intact.    Legs  added. 

Illustration  8 

JARDINIERE 

Box  placed  top  side  up;  cover  removed,  otherwise  left 
intact.    Legs  and  facing  strips  added. 

Illustration  9 

SCRAP-BASKET 

Box  placed  top  side  up;  cover  removed,  otherwise  left 
intact.  Corner  trim  and  false  base  added. 

Illustration  10 

SCRAP-BOX 

Box  placed  top  side  up;  cover  removed,  otherwise  left 
intact.  Projecting  corner  trim  and  false  base  added. 

Illustration  11 

KITCHEN   STOOL 

A  larger  and  deeper  Scrap-box  turned  upside  down. 
Illustration  12 

HANGING  FLOWER-BOX 

The  Scrap-box  with  the  addition  of  holes  in  the  pro- 
jecting corner  trims. 

Illustration  13 

PERFORATED  SCRAP-BOX 

The  Scrap-box  with  the  addition  of  holes  in  each  side. 
Illustration  14 

HANGING  LANTERN 

A  larger  Perforated  Scrap-box  turned  upside  down, 
with  cover  left  on  and  one  side  removed  and  hinged  as  a 
door. 


BOX  FURXITUBE 


MINIATURE  PLANT-BOX 


Illustration  7 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.    1  Salt  Box  (about  4  in.  deep,  4  in.  square). 

Legs.  4  Strips  ^  in.  thick,  %  in.  wide,  1^  in.  longer  than 
height  of  the  box.  4  Strips  *4  in.  thick,  1  in.  wide,  1%  in.  longer 
than  height  of  the  box. 

Construction : 

Trim  off  the  three  sides  at  the  top  of  the  box  which 
contain  the  grooves  that  hold  the  cover.  The  top  of  the 
box  will  then  be  level  or  even  on  all  sides. 

Make  the  legs  1^4  inches  longer  than  the  height  of  the 
box  after  it  has  been  trimmed. 

Place  and  secure  a  leg  at  each  corner,  keeping  the  top 
of  each  leg  even  with  the  top  of  the  box.  Use  wire  nails 
1  inch  long.  Sandpaper  and  fill  imperfections  with 
putty,  and  stain  or  paint  any  desired  color. 

NOTE.  The  Miniature  Flower-boxes  as  shown  on  the 
table  in  the  Dining-room  Interior  are  made  with  the  legs 
projecting  %  of  an  inch  above  the  top  of  the  box  as  well 
as  H4  inches  below. 


28 


BOX  FURNITURE 


JARDINIERE 


Illustration  8 


Figures  1  and  2 


Requirements : 

Body.     1  Butter  Box  (about  10%  in.  deep,  13%  in.  wide, 
in.  long). 

Legs.  4  Strips  y2  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  4  in.  longer  than 
depth  of  the  box.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  4  in.  longer 
than  depth  of  the  box. 

Facing  Strips.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  1%  in.  longer 
than  outside  width  of  the  box.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide, 
1%  in.  longer  than  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  4  inches  longer  than  the  depth  of  the 
box  with  the  cover  removed. 

Remove  the  cover  of  the  box  and  nail  the  legs  to  each 
corner,  keeping  the  tops  of  the  legs  even  with  the  top  of 


BOX  FUKNITUEE 


29 


the  sides  of  the  box.  Cut  the  ends  of  the  facing  strips 
perfectly  square  and  nail  them  in  place,  as  shown  in 
illustration,  allowing  their  inside  edges  to  project  y±  of 
an  inch  over  the  inside  face  of  the  sides  of  the  box. 


30 


BOX  FURNITUEE 


SCRAP-BASKET 


Illustration  9 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.     1  Stuffed-olive  Box  (about  10%  in.  deep,  7 1/2  in.  square). 

Corner  Trim.  4  Strips  ^4  in.  thick,  1  in.  wide,  and  length 
equal  to  height  of  the  box.  4  Strips  14  in.  thick,  1*4  in.  wide, 
and  length  equal  to  height  of  the  box. 

False  Bottom.  1  Piece  l/2  in.  thick,  4  in.  greater  square  than 
the  box. 

Construction : 

Remove  the  cover  or  top  end  from  box.  Make  the  length 
of  corner  trim  equal  to  height  of  the  box.  Turn  the  box 
bottom  up  and  place  the  false  bottom  or  base  upon  it, 
allowing  the  bottom  to  project  2  inches  all  around ;  and 
secure  it  by  nailing  through  it  and  into  the  edges  of  the 
four  sides.  If  the  sides  are  too  thin  to  receive  the  nails, 
nail  through  the  real  bottom  and  clinch  the  nails  on  the 
inside.  Set  the  heads  of  the  nails  well  in,  so  they  will 
be  at  least  even  with  the  bottom  of  the  face.  Invert  the 


BOX  FURNITURE  31 

box,  placing  it  upon  its  new  base.  Measure  and  cut  each 
corner  trim  the  exact  height  of  each  corner.  Nail  a 
corner  trim  to  each  corner  and  clinch  the  nails  on  the 
inside  if  they  project.  Sandpaper  and  fill  imperfections 
with  putty,  and  stain  if  desired. 


32 


BOX  FUENITUEE 


SCRAP-BOX 


Illustration  10 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.     1  Stuffed-olive  Box  (about  10%  in.  deep,  7^  in.  square). 

Corner  Trim.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1  in.  wide,  2*£  in.  longer 
than  height  of  the  box.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  2%  in. 
longer  than  height  of  the  box. 

False  Bottom.  1  Piece  y2  in.  thick,  4  in.  larger  than  the  box 
each  way. 

Construction : 

Remove  the  cover  from  the  box.  Make  the  corner  trim 
2y2  inches  longer  than  the  height  of  the  box.  Proceed 
as  in  Illustration  No.  9  until  ready  to  put  the  corner 
trim  in  place.  Each  corner  trim  should  project 
inches  above  the  top  of  the  box. 


BOX  FUENITURE 


KITCHEN  STOOL 


Illustration  11 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.    1  Olive-oil  Box  (about  14  in.  deep  and  9%  in.  square). 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wider  than  the  outside  of  the 
square  end. 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  16  in.  long.  4  Strips 
%  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  16  in.  long. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  16  inches  long.  Remove  the  cover  from 
the  box.  Turn  the  box  bottom  up  and  nail  the  top  on, 
allowing  it  to  project  l1/^  inches  all  around.  Use  1% 
inch  brads  and  set  their  heads  in  slightly  below  the  top 
face.  Invert  the  box  and  nail  a  leg  on  each  corner,  set- 
ting the  upper  ends  of  the  legs  against  the  under  side  of 
the  top. 


BOX  FUENITUKE 


HANGING  FLOWER-BOX 


Illustration  12 


Figures  1  and  2 


Requirements : 

Same  as  for  Scrap-box,  Illustration  No.  10,  with  the  addition  of 
30  feet  of  ordinary  clothes-line. 

Construction : 

Proceed  the  same  as  described  for  the  construction  of 
the  scrap-box.  Bore  three  y2  inch  holes  in  that  part  of 
the  leg  projecting  above  the  top  of  the  box,  one  hole  in 
one  face  and  two  holes  in  the  other  face  of  each  leg,  all 
located  at  different  levels  as  shown  by  knots  in  the  illus- 
tration. The  rope  is  knotted  on  each  side  of  the  holes 
to  hide  them.  Make  a  variety  of  knots,  using  two  in 
some  and  three  in  others,  thus  giving  the  desired  artistic 
effect,  as  the  charm  of  hanging  boxes  depends  largely 
upon  that  novel  and  simple  method  of  hanging.  Knot 


BOX  FUBNITUKE 


35 


the  ropes  at  uneven  intervals  as  you  will,  without  re- 
gard to  any  rule,  so  long  as  you  obtain  the  desired  effect. 
NOTE.  The  Hanging  Flower-boxes  shown  in  the  Liv- 
ing-room Interior  are  two  of  these  boxes,  each  hung  from 
an  end  of  a  rope,  which  is  suspended,  and  slides  over 
two  hooks,  and  as  one  plant  is  drawn  down  to  be  watered, 
the  other  plant  rises. 


36 


BOX  FURNITURE 


PERFORATED  SCRAP-BOX 


Illustration  13 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Same  as  for  the  Scrap-box,  Illustration  No.  10. 

Construction : 

Same  as  described  for  the  scrap-box,  after  which  per- 
forate as  follows:  Bore  two  rows  of  holes  y2  inch  in 
diameter  through  each  side  near  the  top,  and  three 
rows  of  holes  near  the  bottom,  spaced  apart  equally, 
about  1  inch  from  center  to  center. 


BOX  FUENITURE 


37 


HANGING  LANTERN 


Illustration  14 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.     1  Olive-oil  Box  (about  14*4  in-  deep,  9%  in.  square). 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  4  in.  longer  than 
height  of  the  box.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  l1/^  in.  wide,  4  in.  longer 
than  height  of  the  box. 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  larger  each  way  than  the  end  of 
the  box. 

Crown  Frame.  4  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  8  in.  longer  than 
the  outside  width  of  the  box. 

26  ft.  of  ordinary  clothes-line. 

Construction : 

Make  the  corner  trim  4  inches  longer  than  the  length 
of  the  box.  Remove  one  side.  Place  the  box  on  end  and 


38  BOX  FUBNITURE 

nail  the  top  on,  allowing  it  to  project  evenly  on  all  sides. 
Turn  the  box  upside  down  and  put  on  the  legs.  Fit  the 
door  between  the  legs  and  hang  it.  Bore  six  rows  of 
holes  !/2  incn  in  diameter  through  each  side,  near  the 
top,  and  four  rows  near  the  bottom.  Care  should  be 
taken  that  the  holes  are  laid  out  with  equal  spaces— 
about  1  inch  from  center  to  center  of  holes.  Bore  a  hole 
!/2  inch  in  diameter  through  the  projecting  corner  of  the 
top,  half-way  between  the  outside  corner  of  the  leg  and 
the  corner  of  the  top.  Lay  one  of  the  lower  pieces  of  the 
corner  frame  on  top,  directly  in  line  with  the  holes,  al- 
lowing the  frame  pieces  to  project  equally  over  the  top. 
Mark  the  position  of  the  holes  and  bore  them  %  inch  in 
diameter,  and  use  this  as  a  pattern  to  bore  the  other 
three  pieces.  The  crown  frame  will  be  suspended  by  a 
knot  tied  in  each  rope  and  should  be  about  3  inches  above 
the  top  of  the  lantern.  The  same  artistic  features  of 
hanging  should  be  observed  as  are  described  for  the 
Hanging  Flower-box,  Illustration  No.  12. 


CHAPTER  III 

THE  SAME  PRINCIPLES  AS  CHAPTER  II 
WITH  THE  ADDITION  OF  CIRCULAR  CUTS 


I"    I 


IRoom 


TWIN-BED  TABLE  VASE  WALL  BRACKETS 

TRIPLE-MIRROR  DRESSING-TABLE  AND  CHAIR 

"SHAVINGETTE" 

COMBINATION  WASHSTAND  AND  WARDROBE 
BOOKCASE  DESK       OBLONG  CLOCK 


The  desk  chair  is  not  made  from  boxes. 

Color  Scheme : 

Gray  (dark  and  light). 
White. 

Woodwork : 

Neutral  gray  (paint). 

Furniture : 

Neutral  gray,  with  motif  stenciled  in  white. 

Walls : 

Neutral  gray,  with  motif  stenciled  in  white  and 
old  rose,  or  white  and  lavender. 

Ceiling  : 
White. 

Hangings  and  Bed  Coverings: 

French  gray  colored  linen,  with  motif  appliqued 
or  embroidered  same  color  as  stencil  on  wall. 

Curtains : 

White  muslin. 

Floor: 

Painted  gray;  rugs  light  and  dark  gray,  with 
shade  of  old  rose  or  lavender  in  the  border. 

Plants: 

Cut  flowers  or  growing  plants  with  either  old 
rose,  lavender,  or  white  blossoms. 


• 


•      !•       I"       I 


!•      I*      I 


Illustration  15 


CHAPTER  III 


FOOTSTOOL 


Box  turned  upside  down ;  cover  removed,  otherwise  left 
intact.    Legs  and  false  top  added. 


Illustration  16 


COAL-  OR  PAPER-BOX 


Box  placed  top  side  up;  cover  removed,  otherwise  left 
intact.    Legs  and  false  top  added. 


Illustration  17 


BLACKING-BOX 


Box  placed  top  side  up;  cover  removed,  otherwise  left 
intact.    Legs  and  folding  false  top  with  sole  block  added. 


Illustration  18 


OBLONG  CLOCK  CASE 


Box  placed  on  side;  cover  removed  and  hinged  as  a 
door,  oval  sawed  from  the  bottom.  Legs  and  false  top 
added. 


Illustration  19 


UPRIGHT  CLOCK  CASE 


Box  placed  on  end;  cover  removed  and  hinged  as  a 
door,  oval  sawed  from  the  bottom.  Legs  and  false  top 
added. 


Illustration  20 


NURSERY  CLOCK  CASE 


Box  placed  on  end;  cover  and  one  end  removed.     New 
cover  added. 

.1  :••  :/  :/  :•• 


BOX  FURNITURE 


43 


FOOTSTOOL 


Illustration  15 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.     1  Roach-food  Box  (about  5  in.  deep,  10  in.  square). 
Top.     I  Piece  %  in.  thick,  square  2  in.  greater  than  the  box. 
Legs.  4  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  6%  in.  long.    4  Pieces 
%  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  6^  in.  long. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  6y2  inches  long  and  round  off  the  cor- 
ners of  one  end  of  each  leg,  otherwise  the  constant  mov- 
ing about  of  the  stool  will  have  a  tendency  to  split  off  the 
sharp  corners. 

Remove  the  cover.  Turn  the  box  upside  down  and 
nail  a  leg  on  each  corner  and  clinch  the  nails  on  the 
inside. 

Invert  the  box,  set  it  upon  the  legs,  and  place  the  false 
top  on  it,  allowing  an  even  projection  on  each  side,  and 
nail  it  securely  near  the  edges. 


44  BOX  FURNITURE 

NOTE  1.  The  stool  by  the  bedside  in  the  Nursery  In- 
terior is  an  inverted  box  on  legs  similar  to  the  footstool, 
the  legs  being  longer  and  the  box  of  less  depth  than  the 
footstool. 

NOTE  2.  The  stools  in  the  Club-room  Interior  are 
made  the  same,  with  supports  at  the  base. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


45 


COAL-  OR  PAPER-BOX 


Illustration  16 


Figures  1  and  % 


Requirements : 

Body.  1  Small  Packing  Box  (about  14  in.  deep,  16  in.  wide, 
27  in.  long). 

Cover.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wider  than  the  width  of  the 
Dox,  3  in.  longer  than  the  length  of  the  box  (outside  measure- 
ments). 

Cleats.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  and  the  length  2  in. 
shorter  than  the  inside  width  of  the  box. 

Hardware.  1  Pair  of  2  in.  iron  hinges  (butts)  with  screws  % 
in.  long. 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in-  thick,  1*£  in.  wide,  4  in.  longer  than  the 
depth  of  the  box.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  4  in.  longer 
than  the  depth  of  the  box. 

Hinge-strip.  1  Strip  y2  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  3  in.  shorter  than 
the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  4  inches  longer  than  the  depth  of  the 
box  with  the  cover  removed.  Remove  the  cover.  Turn 


46 


BOX  FURNITURE 


the  box  on  its  side  and  place  and  secure  the  front  legs  on 
the  corners.  Reverse  the  position  of  the  box  and  put  the 
rear  legs  on,  keeping  the  tops  of  all  the  legs  even  with 
the  top  of  the  box.  Clinch  the  nails  on  the  inside  of  the 
box.  Make  the  cover  3  inches  wider  and  3  inches  longer 
than  the  outside  width  and  length  of  the  box.  If  made 
of  two  widths  of  board,  plane  the  edges  straight  and 
true,  butt  tightly  together,  and  place  and  nail  the  cleats 
on  the  under  side.  Place  each  cleat  about  4  inches  from 
the  end  of  the  cover.  Drive  the  nails  from  the  outside 
through  the  cleats  and  clinch  them  on  the  under  side. 
Put  the  hinge-strip  on  the  back  of  the  box  between  the 
legs,  keeping  its  top  edge  even  with  the  top  edge  of  the 
back  of  the  box.  Set  the  cover  in  place,  with  an  even 
projection  all  around.  Place  the  hinges  so  one  half  can 
be  screwed  to  the  under  side  of  the  projecting  back  edge 
of  the  cover,  and  the  other  half  to  the  hinge-strip  on  the 
back  of  the  box,  thus : 

The  hinges  may  be  set 
about  6  inches  from  each  end 
of  the  box.  Sandpaper  and 
fill  imperfections,  and  color 
as  desired. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


47 


BLACKING-BOX 


Illustration  17 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.  1  Butter  Box  (about  5%  in.  deep,  13%  in.  wide,  14*4  in- 
long). 

Top.  Two  Pieces  ^  in.  thick,  1^  in.  wider  than  one  half  the 
outside  width  of  the  box,  by  3  in.  longer  than  the  outside  length  of 
the  box. 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  by  7  in.  longer  than 
the  outside  depth  of  the  box.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  by 
7  in.  longer  than  the  outside  depth  of  the  box. 

Sole  Block.     1  Block  2  in.  thick,  shaped  like  the  sole  of  a  shoe. 

Hardware.     2  1^  in.  hinges  (butts)  and  screws. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  7  inches  longer  than  the  outside  depth 
of  the  box.  Remove  the  cover.  Turn  the  box  on  end  and 
nail  on  the  legs.  Stand  it  right  side  up  on  the  legs ;  nail 
on  one  half  the  cover,  allowing  it  to  project  evenly  on  the 
side  and  ends.  Hang  the  other  half  of  cover,  placing 


48  BOX  FURNITUEE 

the  hinges  in  the  joint  between  each  half  cover.  Cut  the 
edges  of  each  half  cover  to  let  the  hinges  in  even.  Nail 
the  sole  block  on  the  under  side  of  the  hinged  half  of  the 
cover,  and  turn  this  hinged  half  over  on  the  fixed  half 
when  it  is  necessary  to  place  the  foot  on  the  sole  block. 


BOX  FUENITURE 


49 


OBLONG  CLOCK  CASE 


Illustration  18 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.     1  Gelatin  Box  (about  4  in.  deep,  8  in.  wide,  10  in.  long). 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wider  than  the  outside  depth  of 
the  box,  2  in.  longer  than  the  length  of  the  box  outside. 

Legs.  4  Strips  *4  in.  thick,  1  in.  wide,  1^  in.  longer  than  the 
width  of  the  box  outside.  4  Strips  *4  in-  thick,  1*4  in.  wide,  iy2 
in.  longer  than  the  width  of  the  box  outside. 

Hardware.  2  %  in.  brass  hinges  (butts)  and  screws.  1  brass 
hook,  screw-eye,  and  screw. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  iy2  inches  longer  than  the  width  of  the 
box.  Remove  the  cover.  Place  the  box  on  its  side  and 
nail  the  top  in  place,  allowing  it  to  project  1  inch  all 
around.  Secure  the  legs  on  each  corner.  With  the  key- 
hole-saw cut  a  circular  opening  in  the  center  of  the 
bottom  of  the  box,  which  is  now  to  become  the  face  of  the 
Clock  Case.  This  opening  is  to  be  made  of  a  diameter 
to  fit  the  face  of  the  clock.  Measure  the  clock  face  and 
with  a  pair  of  dividers  inscribe  a  circle  as  a  guide.  Cut 
the  opening  a  little  smaller  than  desired.  Sandpaper 


50  BOX  FUENITUKE 

smooth  the  edges  of  the  hole  to  the  correct  size.  From 
the  cover  removed,  make  a  door  to  fit  the  space  between 
the  legs  and  lower  edge  of  the  case  to  the  under  side 
of  the  top.  Hang  it  on  the  hinges  and  use  hook  and  screw- 
eye  to  fasten  it.  Set  the  clock  in  place  and,  if  necessary, 
place  a  small  block  on  the  bottom  inside  for  supporting 
at  the  right  level. 

This  is  especially  adapted  for  the  ordinary  American 
alarm-clock,  which  is  sold  at  a  very  low  price. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


51 


UPRIGHT  CLOCK  CASE 


Illustration  19 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.     1  Gelatin  Box  (about  4  in.  deep,  8  in.  wide,  10  in.  long). 

Top.  1  Piece  ^  in.  thick,  2  in.  wider  than  the  outside  depth  of 
the  box,  2  in.  longer  than  the  outside  width  of  the  box. 

Legs.  4  Strips  *4  in.  thick,  1  in.  wide,  2  in*  longer  than  the 
outside  length  of  the  box.  4  Strips  *4  in-  thick,  1*4  in.  wide,  2  in. 
longer  than  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Hardware.  2  %  in.  brass  hinges  (butts)  and  screws.  1  bras^> 
hook,  screw-eye,  and  screw. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  2  inches  longer  than  the  outside  length 
of  the  box.  Remove  the  cover.  Place  the  box  on  its  end 
and  nail  the  top  in  place,  allowing  its  edges  to  project 
evenly  about  1  inch  all  around.  Invert  the  box,  turning 
the  other  end  up,  and  nail  on  the  legs.  Measure  the 
diameter  of  the  face  of  the  clock  to  be  used,  and,  with  the 
dividers,  inscribe  a  circle  %  inch  smaller  in  diameter 
on  the  original  bottom  of  the  box,  which  is  now  to  be 


52  BOX  FUENITUEE 

the  face  of  the  clock  case,  placing  the  center  of  the 
circle  6  inches  from  the  lower  end  of  the  case.  With  a 
keyhole-saw  cut  around  on  the  circle.  Sandpaper  smooth 
the  edges  of  the  hole  to  the  correct  size.  From  the  cover 
removed,  make  a  door  to  fit  the  case  between  the  legs  on 
the  back,  keeping  the  outer  face  of  the  door  and  the 
outer  face  of  the  legs  even.  Hang  the  door  upon  the 
hinges  and  screw  on  the  hook  and  eye  to  fasten  it.  Set 
the  clock  in  place  and  put  a  small  shelf  or  block  under  it 
to  support  it  at  the  right  level. 


BOX  FUBNITUEE 


53 


NURSERY  CLOCK  CASE 


Illustration  20 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.  1  Extract  of  Beef  Box  (about  3^  in.  deep,  7*4  in-  wide, 
9  in.  long). 

One  Shelf.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  width  and  length  to  fit  inside 
the  box. 


Construction : 

Remove  the  cover  and  one  end.  Make  a  cover  11 
inches  long  from  a  portion  of  another  box.  Five  and 
three  quarter  inches  from  one  end  on  the  center  line  of 
the  cover  will  be  the  center  for  the  hole  which  is  to  be 
cut  that  the  clock  dial  may  be  seen.  With  a  pair  of 
dividers  inscribe  a  circle  to  suit  the  size  of  the  face  of 
the  clock  and  bore  a  hole,  about  y2  inch  in  diameter,  in- 
side the  circle.  The  outer  edge  of  the  hole  should  be 
on  the  circle  line.  Insert  the  keyhole-saw  in  the  small 
opening  and  cut  on  the  line  of  the  circle  completely 
around,  and  sandpaper  true  and  smooth  the  edges  after 


54  BOX  FUENITUEE 

the  circular  piece  is  removed.  Eight  and  a  half  inches 
from  the  same  end  and  on  the  center  line  of  the  cover 
will  be  the  radius  point  for  the  arch.  Set  the  dividers 
2y2  inches  open  and  describe  the  arch  line,  which  is 
slightly  less  than  a  semicircle.  Mark  the  length  of  the 
box  on  each  side  edge  of  the  cover,  and  cut  from  that 
point  to  the  arch  line.  With  the  keyhole-saw  cut 
around  on  the  arch  line.  Fit  the  shelf  in  the  box  at  the 
proper  height  to  suit  the  clock,  which  will  stand  upon 
the  shelf  inside  the  clock  case.  Nail  on  the  cover  with 
the  open  end  of  the  clock  case  at  the  top.  Set  the  clock 
upon  the  shelf  through  the  open  top  end  of  the  case. 
The  face  of  the  clock  case  can  be  made  quite  a  pleasing 
feature  by  the  use  of  an  appropriate  design. 


CHAPTER  IV 

THE  BOX  TAKEN  PARTIALLY  APART  SO 
THAT    IT    LOSES    ITS    ORIGINAL    SHAPE 


College  Stop's  Corner 


PIPE  RACK    PERFORATED  SCRAP-BOX    FLAG  WALL  RACK 
COLLEGE  CORNER  SEAT     PICTURE  FRAME  NO.  1 

HANGING  LANTERN 
CHAFING-DISH  STAND          PLANT-BOX 

Color  Scheme  : 

Mission  oak  (dark  tan). 
Olive  green. 

Woodwork  : 

Mission  oak. 

Furniture  : 

Mission  oak. 

Walls: 

Olive  green,  with  motif  stenciled  in  same  color  as 
furniture. 

Ceiling  : 

Deep  cream. 

Hangings  and  Corner-Seat  Covering: 

Burlap  the  same  color  as  walls,  with  motif  stenciled 
in  same  color  as  furniture. 

Pillows  : 

Burlap  in  olive  green,  old  gold,  old  blues  and  tans, 
with  motif  stenciled  in  same  color  as  furniture. 

Curtains  : 

Net  of  deep  cream  color,  with  motif  stenciled  or  em- 
broidered in  same  color  as  furniture. 

Floor: 

Painted  or  stained  same  color  as  furniture. 

Plants: 

Growing  ivy,  or  plants  with  either  crimson,  bachelor's 
button,  yellow,  or  cream-white  blossoms. 


CHAPTER  IV 


Illustration  21 

SMALL  WALL  RACK 

Box  placed  on  side,  cover  removed.    Sides  set  in. 


Illustration  22 

WALL  BRACKET 

Box  placed  on  side,  cover  removed.    Ends  set  in. 

Illustration  23 

VASE  WALL  BRACKET 

Box  placed  on  end,  cover  removed.    Sides  set  in. 


Illustration  24 


KITCHEN    SPICE-BOX 


Box  placed  on  end,  cover  removed  and  used  for  shelves. 
Sides  set  in. 


Illustration  25 

PIPE  RACK 

The  Vase  Wall  Bracket,  with  the  top  perforated. 


Illustration  26 

HOUSEWIFE'S  HANDY  RACK  NO.  1 

The  Small  Wall  Eack,  with  the  upper  shelf  perforated. 


BOX  FURNITUKE 


59 


SMALL  WALL  RACK 


Illustration  21 


Figures  1  and  2 


Requirements : 

Body.  1  Condensed-milk  Box  (about  7*4  in.  deep,  13  in.  wide, 
19%  in.  long). 

Hardware.     2  picture  hooks  and  picture  wire. 

Construction : 

Remove  the  cover  carefully  and  put  it  aside  for  future 
use.  Take  off  both  sides  by  withdrawing  the  nails,  and 
cut  off  each  end  of  the  sides,  making  them  the  exact 
length  of  the  box  inside.  Draw  a  pencil  line  across  the 
bottom  and  up  each  end,  2y2  inches  from  the  side  edges. 
Set  the  sides  in,  keeping  their  outside  faces  on  the  pencil 
line,  and  secure  them  by  nails  driven  through  each  end 
and  through  the  bottom*  Plane  off  all  the  edges  neces- 
sary to  make  them  even  with  each  other,  using  sandpaper 
afterward  to  remove  any  objectionable  blemishes  or  in- 


60  BOX  FURNITURE 

equalities.  Bore  a  hole  %  inch  in  diameter  in  the  center 
of  each  end,  4  inches  down  from  the  top  edge  of  the  rack. 
Insert  the  hanging  wires  through  the  holes  from  the 
outside,  and  knot  their  ends  tightly  and  sufficiently  large 
not  to  be  drawn  through  the  holes  when  the  rack  is  hung 
upon  the  wall  and  filled  with  books. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


61 


WALL  BRACKET 


Illustration  gg 


Figures  1  and  2 


Requirements : 

Body.  1  Condensed-milk  Box  (about  7*4  in-  deep,  13  in.  wide, 
19%  in.  long). 

Hardware.     2  picture  hooks  and  picture  wire. 

Construction : 

Remove  the  cover  carefully  and  put  aside  for  future 
use. 

If  possible,  withdraw  all  the  nails  from  the  ends  of 
the  box  without  marring  the  sides.  Otherwise,  take  the 
box  apart  by  first  removing  the  bottom,  then  the  sides. 

If  any  portions  are  rough  or  bear  objectionable  brands 
or  blemishes,  either  plane  or  sandpaper  them  smooth 
while  the  parts  are  separated  and  the  nails  removed. 

Draw  a  pencil  line  across  the  best  face  of  each  of  the 
sides  4  inches  from  each  end.  Set  the  ends  in,  keeping 
the  outside  face  of  the  ends  exactly  to  the  line,  and  nail 
each  side  to  the  ends,  using  care  to  keep  all  the  edges 
even  with  each  other.  Draw  a  line  across  the  best  face 
of  the  bottom  4  inches  from  each  end,  and  then  put  the 


62  BOX  FURNITUEE 

bottom  on,  driving  the  nails  in  just  far  enough  to  tack 
it  at  first,  as  the  bracket  must  be  square.  Lay  the  bracket 
on  its  side  on  the  floor.  Square  it  by  holding  the  square 
inside  while  the  back  is  securely  nailed  in  place.  Stain 
or  paint  as  desired. 

The  bracket  may  be  hung  with  wire  from  molding  or 
fastened  to  the  wall  by  two  screws. 


BOX  FUENITUEE 


63 


VASE  WALL  BRACKET 


Illustration  23 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

The  same  as  for  the  Small  Wall  Rack,  shown  in  Illustration 
No.  21. 


Construction: 

The  same  as  described  for  the  Small  Wall  Rack,  Illus- 
tration No.  21,  with  the  single  exception  that  the  bracket 
is  hung  from  one  end  only,  the  holes  being  bored  4  inches 
from  the  back  and  2  inches  from  the  side  edge.  The  wire 
knots  are  on  the  under  side  of  the  top  of  the  bracket. 


64 


BOX  FUKNITUEE 


KITCHEN  SPICE-BOX 


Illustration  24 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.  1  Peanut-butter  Box  (about  4%  in.  deep,  12%  in.  wide, 
18*4  in.  long).  8  Salt  Boxes  (about  4  in.  deep,  4  in.  wide,  4  in. 
long). 

Shelves.  3  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  as  wide  as  the  inside  depth  ot 
the  large  box,  and  8*4  in.  long. 

Construction : 

Make  the  rack  the  same  as  described  for  the  Small 
Wall  Rack,  Illustration  No.  21. 

Fit  and  nail  the  shelves  in  place,  spacing  them  equal 
distances  apart,  thus  making  four  compartments  of  equal 
size.  Place  the  rack  on  end  and  hang  it  in  that  position 
on  the  wall. 

Place  two  of  the  small  boxes  in  each  compartment  and 
put  the  spices  in  them. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


65 


PIPE  RACK 


Illustration  25 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

The  same  as  for  the  Small  Wall  Rack,  Illustration  No.  21. 

Construction : 

Make  the  same  as  the  Small  Wall  Rack,  Illustration 
No.  21,  and  turn  the  rack  on  end/ 

Bore  the  five  holes  in  the  top  end  i£  inch  in  diameter 
for  receiving  the  stems  of  short  pipes.  Gouge  depres- 
sions y2  inch  deep  on  the  inside  face  of  the  bottom  end 
to  receive  the  bowls  of  the  long  pipes.  Drive  staples 
into  the  inside  face  of  the  back  at  such  heights  as  are 
best  adapted  to  the  various  long  pipes. 


66 


BOX  FURNITUKE 


HOUSEWIFE'S  HANDY  RACK  No.   1 

Illustration  26  Figures  1  and  2 


Requirements  : 

Body.     1  Condensed-milk  Box  (about  7%  in.  deep,  13  in.  wide, 
19%  in.  long). 

Hardware.     Picture  wife  and  hooks. 


Construction  : 

Make  body  of  the  rack  the  same  as  described  for  the 
Small  Wall  Rack,  Illustration  No.  21. 

Bore  two  rows  of  holes  %  inch  in  diameter,  spaced 
about  2  inches  from  center  to  center.  The  center  of  the 
•front  row  of  holes  is  %  inch  and  the  center  of  the  sec- 
ond row  2!/2  inches  back  from  the  front  edge  of  the  rack. 
Cut  slots  !/4  inch  wide  from  the  front  edge  to  the  front 
row  of  holes. 

About  half-way  between  the  rear  row  of  holes  and  the 
back  of  the  rack,  gouge  out  the  top  of  each  end  of  the 
rack  to  fit  the  handle  of  the  rolling-pin.  Hang  with 
picture  hooks  and  wire,  or  nail  to  the  wall,  as  desired. 


CHAPTER  V 
COMBINATIONS  OF  CHAPTER  IV 


Gbe  Ikitcben 


HOUSEWIFE'S  HANDY  RACK  NO.  3 
ROLLING  SOILED-DISH  TABLE  PAPER-BOX 

BROOM  SHELF 
KITCHEN  TABLE        NEWSPAPER  RACK 

Color  Scheme : 
White. 
Blue  (the  color  of  your  agate  ware). 

Woodwork : 

White  paint. 

Furniture : 

White  paint,  with  motif  stenciled  in  blue. 

Walls  : 

White,  with  motif  and  motto  stenciled  in  blue. 

Ceiling : 
White. 

Curtains : 

White  cotton,  with  motif  appliqued  in  blue. 

Aprons  and  Kitchen  Dresses: 

Same  shade  of  blue,  or  white. 

Floor: 

Blue  and  white  oilcloth  or  linoleum. 

Plants : 

Growing  parsley  and  plants  with  white  blossoms. 


CHAPTER  V 

^ 

Illustration  27 

KITCHEN  COMFORT 

Two   boxes   placed   upon   sides,   one   upon  the   other; 
covers  removed  (one  used  as  shelf),  otherwise  left  intact. 

Illustration  28 

DOUBLE  WALL  RACK 

Two  Small  Wall  Backs  in  combination.     Facing  strips 
added. 

Illustration  29 

LARGE  WALL  BOOK  RACK 

Three    Small    Wall    Eacks    in    combination.      Facing 
strips  added. 

Illustration  30 

WALL  BOOK  AND  KNICKKNACK  BRACKET 

One  Small  Wall  Eack  and  two  Wall  Brackets  in  com- 
bination.   Facing  strips  and  false  top  added. 

Illustration  31 

HOUSEWIFE'S  HANDY  RACK  NO.  2 

Two  Wall  Brackets  in  combination.     The  two  upper 
shelves  perforated. 

Illustration  32 

MAGAZINE  RACK 

Three  boxes  turned  on  end;  covers  removed  and  used 
as  shelves.    Legs  and  false  top  added. 

Illustration  33 

SHOE  CUPBOARD 

The  Magazine  Eack  with  doors  added. 
Illustration  34 

HOUSEWIFE  JS  HANDY  RACK  NO.  3 

Box    placed    on    end;    cover    removed    and    used    as 
shelves.     Two  upper  shelves  perforated.     Drawers  added. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


71 


KITCHEN  COMFORT 


Illustration  27 


Figures  1  and  2 


Requirements : 

Body.  2  Condensed-milk  Boxes  (about  7^4  in.  deep,  13  in.  wide, 
19%  in.  long). 

Shelf.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  width  equal  to  the  inside  depth  of 
the  box,  and  length  equal  to  the  inside  length  of  the  box. 

Construction : 

Remove  the  covers  of  both  boxes,  reserving  one  cover 
from  which  to  cut  the  shelf. 

Place  one  box  upon  the  other,  as  shown  in  the  illustra- 
tion. Secure  them  together  by  nailing  through  the  lower 
side  of  the  upper  box  and  the  upper  side  of  the  lower 
box,  and  clinch  the  nails  underneath.  In  doing  so,  drive 
the  nails  near  the  edges,  to  insure  solidity.  Keep  the 
boxes  perfectly  matched  while  nailing.  Cut  the  shelf 
to  the  neat  inside  length  and  nail  it  in,  keeping  its  under 
side  1  inch  higher  than  the  top  of  the  pint  jars.  Secure 
it  by  driving  nails  through  each  end  of  the  box  into  the 
ends  of  the  shelf. 


72 


BOX  FUENITURE 


DOUBLE  WALL  BACK 


Illustration  28 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.  2  Condensed-milk  Boxes  (about  7*4  in.  deep,  13  in.  wide, 
19%  in.  long). 

Facing  Strips.  3  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  and  length 
equal  to  the  inside  width  of  the  box. 

Construction : 

Make  two  Small  Wall  Racks  as  described  for  Illustra- 
tion No.  21.  Stand  one  rack  on  its  end  and  place  the 
other  rack  upon  it  endwise,  with  both  compartments  fac- 
ing the  same  way.  Match  their  edges  and  nail  them 
together. 

Nail  the  facing  strips  on  the  vertical  edge  faces,  al- 
lowing the  middle  one  to  project  evenly  on  each  side, 
and  having  the  outside  edge  of  the  end  ones  even  with 
the  end  of  the  rack. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


73 


LARGE  WALL  BOOK  RACK 


Illustration  29 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.  3  Condensed-milk  Boxes  (about  7*4  in.  deep,  13  in.  wide, 
19%  in.  long). 

Facing  Strips.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  as  long  as  the 
inside  width  of  the  box. 


Construction : 

This  rack  is  a  combination  of  three  small  racks  as 
shown  for  Small  Wall  Rack,  Illustration  No.  21. 

Make  three  small  racks  as  described  therein,  all  of 
equal  size. 

Place  one  rack  on  end  upon  the  floor,  then  place  the 
second  one  on  this,  also  endwise.  Secure  the  ends  to- 
gether by  driving  the  nails  from  the  inside  of  the  top 
bracket  and  clinch  them  on  the  under  side.  Place  the 
third  rack  on  the  second  and  secure  it  in  the  same  man- 
ner. Care  must  be  exercised  to  keep  the  edges  even  with 
each  other  and  have  all  three  brackets,  when  joined, 
form  a  straight  line. 


74  BOX  FURNITURE 

Place  the  facing  strips  on  the  front  face  of  the  ends  to 
cover  joints  as  shown,  the  outer  edge  of  end  strip  to  be 
even  with  the  outside  face  of  the  rack ;  %  inch  holes  may 
be  bored  through  the  back  face,  as  shown  in  the  illustra- 
tion. The  rack  may  be  hung  with  wire  from  a  molding. 

NOTE.  The  Broom  Shelf  shown  in  the  Kitchen  In- 
terior is  the  Large  Wall  Rack  with  a  curtain,  and  hooks 
added  underneath  on  which  to  hang  the  brooms  and 
aprons. 


BOX  FUENITUEE 


75 


WALL  BOOK  AND  KNICKKNACK  BRACKET 

Illustration  30  Figures  1  and  2 


Requirements : 

Body.  3  Condensed-milk  Boxes  (about  7^4  in.  deep,  13  in.  wide, 
19%  in.  long). 

Top.     1  Board  %  in.  thick,  49  in.  long. 

Facing  Strips.    4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide. 

Construction : 

This  construction  combines  principles  in  Small  Wall 
Rack,  Illustration  No.  21,  and  Wall  Bracket,  Illustra- 
tion No.  22.  The  two  end  compartments  are  formed  of 
boxes  with  their  ends  set  in,  similar  to  those  in  the  Wall 
Bracket,  while  the  middle  section  is  a  partial  adaptation 
of  that  shown  for  Small  Wall  Rack. 

To  form  the  end  sections,  proceed  as  described  for  the 
Wqll  Bracket,  except  in  this  case  draw  the  lines  so  that 
one  end  of  each  box  will  set  in  2%  inches,  while  the 


76 


BOX  FURNITURE 


other  end  will  set  in  8  inches.  The  latter  in  the  com- 
pleted rack  forms  the  shelf  in  each  end  section. 

Form  the  middle  section  by  removing  one  side  of  the 
box,  cut  off  this  side  piece,  set  it  in  2y2  inches,  precisely 
the  same  as  described  for  Small  Wall  Rack,  except  that 
only  one  side  is  removed,  shortened,  and  set  in. 

Having  the  three  sections  formed,  stand  the  middle 
section  on  end  and  upon  it  place  on  its  side  one  of  the 
end  sections,  the  open  compartments  facing  the  same 
way.  Set  the  bottom  and  front  edges  even,  and  secure 
the  sections  together  by  driving  nails  through  the  side 
of  the  end  section  and  into  the  end  of  the  middle  section, 
clinching  the  nails  well  inside  the  latter  section. 


Reverse  them,  placing  the  side  of  the  end  section  upon 
the  floor,  with  the  blank  end  of  the  middle  section  up. 
Set  the  other  end  section  upon  this  and  secure  them  in 
the  same  manner.  Set  the  bracket  upon  the  floor,  right 
side  up,  just  as  it  would  hang  on  the  wall.  Place  the  top 
on  with  rear  edge  even  with  the  back  of  the  bracket, 
and  mark  and  cut  it  so  that  it  will  project  l1/^  inches 


BOX  FUKNITUKE  77 

over  each  end  and  front  edge  of  bracket,  and  nail  it  in 
position  securely.  Measure  and  cut  the  facing  strips 
and  nail  them  in  place,  keeping  the  outside  edge  of  the 
end  ones  even  with  the  end  of  the  bracket. 

The  bracket  may  be  hung  upon  four  picture  cords  sus- 
pended from  hooks  on  the  molding,  or  in  any  way  best 
adapted  to  the  surroundings. 


78 


BOX  FURNITURE 


HOUSEWIFE'S  HANDY  RACK  No.  2 

Illustration  31  Figures  1  and  2 


Requirements  : 

Body.     2  Condensed-milk  Boxes  (about 
19%  in.  long). 

Hardware.     2  picture  hooks  and  picture  wire. 


in.  deep,  13  in.  wide, 


Construction  : 

Remove  the  covers  carefully  for  future  use.  With- 
draw all  the  nails  from  the  end  of  one  box  without 
marring  the  sides  or  bottom  any  more  than  is  necessary. 
Move  the  end  in  so  that  the  sides  and  bottom  will  project 
4  inches  beyond  the  outside  face  of  the  end.  Nail  the 
sides  and  bottom  to  the  end.  Do  the  same  with  the  other 
end  of  the  same  box,  and  it  will  then  look  like  the  lower 
half  of  the  illustration.  Do  the  same  thing  with  the 
other  box,  and  they  will  be  ready  to  join  together. 


BOX  FURNITURE  79 

Turn  one  box  on  its  side  and  place  the  other  box  on  its 
side  upon  the  first,  the  open  sides  facing  in  the  same 
direction.  Match  their  edges  and  nail  them  together, 
driving  the  nails  from  the  inside  of  the  upper  compart- 
ment, through  both  thicknesses,  into  the  lower  compart- 
ment and  clinch  them. 

In  each  end,  1  inch  from  the  front  edge  and  2  inches 
from  the  bottom  of  compartment,  bore  a  hole  large 
enough  to  receive  the  handle  of  the  rolling-pin.  Saw  a 
slightly  slanting  slot  of  the  same  width  as  the  diameter 
of  the  hole  from  the  front  edge  of  the  end  to  the  outer 
edge  of  the  hole,  and  trim  off  slightly  the  sharp  edges 
and  sandpaper  smooth.  Do  the  same  in  the  other  end 
and  fit  the  rolling-pin  in. 

Bore  suitable  holes  for  receiving  the  handles  of  the 
spoons  through  the  top  of  the  rack,  say  about  1  inch 
from  edge  to  center  of  the  holes,  and  fit  the  spoons  in 
them.  Bore  holes  in  the  bottom  of  the  rack  to  suit  the 
smallest  part  of  the  knife  handles,  the  same  distance 
from  the  edge.  Saw  slots  y±  inch  wide  from  edge  to  the 
hole  to  pass  the  knife  blades,  and  fit  the  knives  in.  Small 
brass  hooks  may  be  put  in  convenient  places  for  various 
articles. 

The  rack  may  be  hung  from  the  molding  with  picture 
hooks  and  wire,  or,  if  more  convenient,  fastened  through 
the  back  to  the  wall  with  screws. 


80 


BOX  FUENITUKE 


MAGAZINE  RACK 


Illustration  32 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.  3  Washing-soap  Boxes  (about  11%  in.  deep,  14^4  in- 
wide,  20  in.  long). 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wider  than  the  depth  of  the 
box  with  the  cover  removed,  and  2%  in.  longer  than  three  times  the 
outside  width  of  the  box. 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  and  4  in.  longer  than 
the  outside  length  of  the  box.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide, 
and  4  in.  longer  than  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Facing  Strips.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  and  4  in.  longer 
than  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Shelves.  7  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  width  equal  to  the  inside  depth 
of  the  box,  and  length  equal  to  the  inside  width  of  the  box.  A  por- 
tion can  be  made  from  the  covers  removed. 

Cleats.  14  Strips  y2  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  and  length  equal  to 
the  inside  depth  o-f  the  box.  6  Strips  y2  in.  thick,  ll/2  in-  wide, 
4  in.  shorter  than  the  inside  width  of  the  box. 


BOX  FURNITURE  81 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  4  inches  longer  than  the  outside  length 
of  the  box.  Kemove  the  covers.  Lay  one  box  on  its  side 
and  another  on  its  side  on  top  of  the  first  box.  Secure 
them  together  by  nailing  through  the  abutting  sides.  On 
,top  of  the  second  box  place  the  third  and  secure  it  in  the 
same  manner.  Clinch  the  nails  on  the  inside,  having 
the  open  compartments  all  face  the  same  way.  Space  the 
shelves  to  suit  height  of  the  books.  The  under  side  of 
the  shelf  will  be  the  top  line  of  the  cleat.  Mark  on  each 
side  of  each  compartment  these  top  lines  and  nail  the 
cleats  in  place.  Place  and  secure  the  false  top,  keeping 
its  rear  edge  even  with  the  rear  outside  face  of  the  back 
legs,  allowing  it  to  project  at  the  ends  and  in  front  1 
inch  over  the  outside  face  of  the  legs.  Nail  it  securely 
near  the  outer  edges.  Nail  the  corner  legs  and  the  rear 
facing  strips  in  place,  and  then  fit  the  shelves  and  put  in 
place  upon  the.  cleats.  The  shelves  need  not  be  secured 
at  all,  and  can  be  readily  emptied,  removed,  and  cleaned 
when  necessary. 


82 


BOX  FURNITURE 


SHOE  CUPBOARD 


Illustration  33 


Figures  1  and  2 


Requirements : 

Same  as  for  Magazine  Rack,  Illustration  No.  32,  with  the  addi- 
tion of  doors,  etc.,  also  as  follows: 

Doors.  3  Pieces  V2  in.  thick,  the  width  2  in.  less  than  the  out- 
side -width  of  the  box,  and  length  equal  to  the  outside  length  of 
the  box. 

Cleats.  6  Strips  ^  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  about  1  ft.  long  to  cut 
for  door  cleats. 

Hardware.  6  1%  in.  iron  hinges  (butts)  with  screws  which 
come  with  them.  3  small  door  pull-knobs.  3  brass  buttons  and 
screws. 


Construction : 

Proceed  the  same  as  for  Magazine  Rack.  Fit  the  doors 
and  put  the  ele'ats  on  about  3  inches  from  each  end. 
They  must  be  so  placed  as  to  clear  the  shelves  when  door 
is  closed.  Mark  on  the  doors  the  position  of  the  hinges, 
say  about  4  inches  from  both  top  and  bottom ;  cut  out  the 
edge  of  the  door  enough  to  let  one  side  of  the  hinges  in 
even.  Set  the  door  in  place  and  mark  the  leg  and  cut 


BOX  FURNITURE 


83 


that  in  a  similar  way.  Screw  the  hinges  to  the  door,  then 
set  the  door  up  and  screw  to  the  leg.  The  outside  face 
of  the  doors  will  be  even  with  the  face  of  the  legs.  Place 
the  pull-knobs  about  one  third  the  distance  down  from 
the  top  of  the  door  and  2  inches  from  the  edge.  Screw 
the  buttons  on  the  facing  strips  at  the  same  height  as  the 
pull-knobs. 


84 


BOX  FURNITURE 


HOUSEWIFE'S  HANDY  RACK  No.  3 

Illustration  34  Figures  1  and  2 

Requirements : 

Body.  1  Cereal  Box  (about  6  in.  deep,  17%  in-  wide,  23  in. 
long). 

Drawers.     2  Salt  Boxes. 

Shelves.     May  be  made  from  the  cover  removed. 

Hardware.  2  very  small  pull-knobs  for  draweis.  2  picture 
hooks  and  wire. 


Construction : 

Make  the  body  of  the  rack  the  same  as  described  for 
Small  Wall  Rack,  Illustration  No.  21.  Fit  the  shelves. 
Bore  and  slot  the  upper  shelf,  and  bore  the  holes  in  the 
top  end,  cutting  openings  for  the  rolling-pin,  the  same 
as  described  for  Housewife's  Handy  Rack  No.  2,  Illus- 
tration No.  31.  The  rolling-pin  in  this  rack  will  hang 
about  midway  between  the  top  of  the  rack  and  the  knife- 
and-fork  shelf. 


BOX  FURNITURE  85 

Remove  the  covers  from  the  salt  boxes  and  place  the 
boxes  in  position  as  shown  in  the  illustration.  Fasten 
with  small  brads  a  small  guide  strip  about  ^  inch  square 
along  the  side  and  back  of  each  box  and  to  the  bottom  of 
the  rack,  to  guide  the  boxes  as  well  as  to  prevent  them 
being  pushed  in  too  far.  Lay  the  lower  shelf  on  them 
and  fasten  it  in  place  with  W2  inch  brads  driven  through 
the  sides  and  back  of  the  rack  into  its  edges.  About 
midway  between  this  shelf  and  the  top  of  the  rack  will 
be  placed  the  knife-and-fork  shelf.  Fasten  it  with  brads 
in  the  same  way.  Stand  the  bread-board  across  the  top 
of  the  rack  and  mark  its  width  near  the  back  on  the  top 
of  the  rack.  Measure  2  inches  from  the  back  of  the  rack 
at  these  points  and  bore  a  1  inch  hole  at  each  point. 
Connect  the  edges  of  these  holes  with  scratch  or  pencil 
lines,  and  with  a  keyhole-saw  cut  the  slot  along  the  lines 
for  receiving  the  bread-board.  One  half  of  the  hole 
made  by  the  auger  will  form  the  end  of  the  slot.  The 
bottom  of  the  bread-board  will  rest  upon  the  upper  shelf. 
Screw  the  pull-knobs  on  the  drawers  and  hang  the  rack 
with  picture  hooks  and  wire,  or  screw  to  the  side  wall, 
as  may  be  desired.  If  to  be  hung,  bore  two  holes  i/s  inch 
in  diameter  through  the  top,  4  inches  from  the  back  and 
2  inches  from  the  sides.  Pass  wire  through  and  knot  it 
on  the  under  side. 


CHAPTER  VI 

LARGER  BOXES,  APPLYING  THE  SAME  OR  SIMILAR 
PRINCIPLES  AS  IN  CHAPTER  V 


©ffice 


OFFICE  WASHSTAND  FLOWER-  AND  BOOK-STAND 

QUADRUPLE  WRITING-DESK 

KNICKKNACK  BRACKET  OFFICE  FILE 

FIREPLACE  BOOKCASE 

The  chairs  are  not  made  of  boxes. 

Color  Scheme : 
Light  oak. 
Tan. 
Olive  green. 

Woodwork : 
Light  oak. 

Furniture: 

Light  oak. 

Walls: 

Burlap  in  natural  color,  or  with  motif  stenciled  in 
olive  green. 

Ceiling : 

Tan  in  lighter  shade  than  the  walls. 

Hangings  : 

Burlap  in  olive  green. 

Curtains: 

Net  in  same  color  as  hangings. 

Floor: 


Stained  light   oak,   with  rugs   of  plain   olive   green 
same  color  as  walls. 


Plants: 


Growing  plants  with  either  crimson  or  orange-colored 
blossoms. 


CHAPTER  VI 

? 

Illustration  35 

FLOWER-STAND 

Box  placed  top  side  up;  cover  removed  and  used  as 
shelf.  Legs  added. 

Illustration  36 

SOILED-LINEN  RECEIVER 

Box  placed  top  side  up;  cover  removed  and  hinged  as 
lid.  Projecting  corner  trim  and  facing  strips  added. 

Illustration  37 

SHIRT-WAIST  CLOSET 

Box  placed  on  end ;  cover  removed  and  hinged  as  door. 
Legs  and  false  top  added. 

Illustration  38 

' '  NOTIONETTE  ' ' 

Box  placed  on  end;  cover  removed  and  hinged  as  door. 
Shelves,  corner  trim,  and  false  top  added. 

Illustration  39 

OFFICE  WASHSTAND 

Box  placed  on  end;  cover  removed  and  hinged  as 
double  door.  Shelves,  legs,  and  hinged  top  added. 

Illustration  40 

DESK   CHAIR 

Box  placed  top  side  up;  cover  removed  and  hinged  as 
lid.  Shelf,  legs,  and  arms  added. 

Illustration  41 

QUADRUPLE  WRITING-DESK 

Eight  boxes  placed  on  end.  Four  have  covers  removed 
and  hinged  as  doors.  Four  have  sides  removed  and 
hinged  as  doors.  Shelves,  corner  trims,  and  false  top 
added. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


91 


FLOWER-STAND 


Illustration  35 


Figure  I 


Requirements : 

Body.     1  Candle  Box  (about  7  in.  deep,  12  in.  square). 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1*4  in.  wide,  9  in.  longer  than  the 
outside  depth  of  the  box.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  9  in. 
longer  than  the  outside  depth  of  the  box. 

Cleats.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1^  in.  wide,  and  length  equal  to 
the  outside  width  of  the  box. 


Construction : 

Make  the  legs  9  inches  longer  than  the  outside  depth 
of  the  box.  Remove  the  cover  carefully.  Nail  a  cleat 
across  each  end  on  the  side  presenting  the  worst  appear- 
ance, keeping  the  edge  of  the  cleat  even  with  the  end  of 
the  cover.  Turn  the  box  on  its  side  and  nail  on  the  legs, 
keeping  their  upper  ends  even  with  the  top  of  the  box. 
The  cover  (with  the  cleats  across  the  ends  to  keep  it  flat) 
is  to  be  the  shelf.  Turn  the  stand  upside  down  and  set 


92  BOX  FURNITURE 

the  shelf  in  place  between  the  legs,  keeping  it  4  inches 
from  the  bottom  of  the  legs,  and  nail  through  each  face 
of  leg  into  its  edges.  The  stand  will  be  complete,  ready 
for  staining  or  painting,  as  desired. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


93 


SOILED-LINEN  RECEIVER 


Illustration  36 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.     1  Tea  Box  (about  17  in.  deep,  17  in.  square). 

Corner  Trim.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  4  in.  longer 
than  the  outside  length  of  the  box.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in. 
wide,  4  in.  longer  than  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Braces.  2  Strips  ^  in.  thick,  1V&  in.  wide,  and  length  equal  to 
outside  depth  of  the  box.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1^  in.  wide,  by  1 
in.  shorter  than  the  outside  width  of  the  box. 

Facing  Strips.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  and  length 
equal  to  outside  depth  of  the  box.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide, 
and  length  equal  to  outside  width  of  the  box. 

Cover.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  width  equal  to  the  outside  depth  of 
the  box,  and  length  equal  to  the  outside  width  of  the  box. 

Hardware.  2  1%  in.  brass  hinges  (butts)  and  screws.  1  porce- 
lain pull-knob. 


94  BOX  FURNITURE 

Construction : 

Make  the  projecting  corner  trim  4  inches  longer  than 
the  outside  length  of  the  box.  Remove  one  end.  This 
may  be  done  by  striking  on  the  inside  of  the  box  gently 
and  loosening  the  nails  just  enough  so  that  they  may  be 
drawn  out.  It  is  not  necessary  to  take  the  box  entirely 
apart.  Nail  the  loosened  parts  together  again  and 
stand  the  box  with  the  open  end  up,  and  nail  the  corner 
trim  on.  Nail  the  short  braces  to  the  inside  face  of  the 
corner  trim,  with  their  top  edges  even  with  the  upper 
end  of  the  projecting  corner  trim.  Do  the  same  with 
the  longer  braces.  Put  the  facing  strips  on  top,  flat  side 
down,  allowing  one  end  and  the  outside  edge  to  project 
!/2  inch  over  the  outside  face  of  the  corner  trim  all 
around.  Make  the  cover  in  two  parts,  the  rear  part 
being  a  strip  l1/^  inch  wide.  Place  this  strip  between  the 
corner  trim  on  the  rear  top  of  the  box,  with  its  rear  edge 
against  the  inner  face  of  the  corner  trim,  and  nail  both 
ends  and  along  the  back  edge.  Hang  the  door  to  the 
inner  edge  of  this  strip  and  screw  the  knob  in  place. 


BOX  FUENITUEE 


95 


SHIRT-WAIST  CLOSET 


Illustration  37 


Figures  1  and  2 


Requirements : 

Body.  1  Packing  Box  (about  13  in.  deep,  21  in.  wide,  33  in. 
long). 

Door.     Made  from  the  cover  of  the  box. 

Door  Cleats.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  4  in.  shorter 
than  the  outside  width  of  the  box. 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wider  and  3  in.  longer  than  the 
outside  width  and  depth  of  the  box. 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  l1/^  in.  wide,  4  in.  longer  than  the 
outside  length  of  the  box.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  4  in. 
longer  than  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Hardware.  2  1^  in.  tee  hinges  and  screws.  1  porcelain  pull- 
knob.  1  brass  button  and  screw.  6  wire  hooks.  6  coat-hangers. 


Construction : 

Make  the  legs  4  inches  longer  than  the  outside  length 
of  the  box.    Remove  the  cover.    Turn  the  box  on  its  side 


96  BOX  FURNITURE 

and  nail  on  the  legs.  Fit  the  door,  nail  the  cleats  on,  and 
hang  it,  placing  the  hinges  between  the  edges  of  the 
door  and  leg  if  desired.  Stand  the  closet  on  its  legs  and 
nail  the  top  on,  allowing  it  to  project  evenly  all  around. 
Screw  six  hooks  into  the  under  face  of  the  top  at  the 
center  of  the  closet,  about  2  inches  apart,  and  place  a 
coat-hanger  on  each  hook. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


97 


NOTIONETTE 


Illustration  38 


Figures  1  and  2 


This  is  a  most  convenient  article  where,  in  a  limited 
space,  it  is  impossible  to  place  a  bureau.  Two  of  these 
were  used  in  a  studio  for  two  years,  one  being  used  as 
above  and  the  other  as  an  annex  to  the  desk. 


Requirements : 

Body.  1  Soap  Box  (about  8  in.  deep,  13^4  in.  wide,  27%  in. 
long). 

Shelves.  5  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  width  equal  to  the  inside  depth 
of  the  box,  and  length  equal  to  the  inside  width  of  the  box. 

Shelf  Fronts.  5  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  and  length  equal 
to  the  inside  width  of  the  box. 

Door.     Made  from  the  cover  of  the  box. 

Cleats.  2  Pieces,  %  in.  thick,  1^  in.  wide,  and  4  in.  shorter 
than  the  outside  width  of  the  box. 

Corner  Trim.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  and  length 
equal  to  the  outside  length  of  the  box.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in. 
wide,  and  length  equal  to  the  outside  length  of  the  box, 

7 


98  BOX  FURNITURE 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wider  than  the  outside  depth, 
and  3  in.  longer  than  the  outside  width  of  the  box. 

Hardware.  2  1%  in.  brass  butts  and  screws.  1  porcelain  pull- 
knob.  1  brass  button  and  screw. 

Construction : 

Make  the  corner  trim  as  long  as  the  outside  length  of 
the  box.  Remove  the  cover,  and  fit  and  nail  in  the 
shelves  at  such  heights  as  seem  practical,  using  1  inch 
brads  driven  from  outside  through  into  the  edge  of  the 
shelf.  Place  a  shelf  front  across  the  front  edge  of  each 
shelf,  its  edge  up,  and  fasten  it  with  brads.  Put  the 
corner  trim  on  and  nail  on  the  top,  allowing  it  to  project 
evenly  all  around.  Lay  the  notionette  on  its  back,  then 
put  the  cleats  on  the  doors  and  hang  them,  and  screw 
on  the  pull-knob  and  brass  button. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


99 


OFFICE  WASHSTAND 


Illustration  39 


Figures  land  2 


Requirements : 

Body.  1  Packing  Box  (about  14  in.  deep,  18  in.  wide,  36  in. 
long). 

Shelves.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  width  equal  to  the  inside 
depth  of  the  box,  and  length  equal  to  the  inside  width  of  the  box. 

Doors.     Made  from  cover  of  box. 

Hinged  Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  4  in.  wider  than  the  outside 
depth  of  the  box,  and  4  in.  longer  than  the  outside  width  of  the 
box. 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  and  4  in.  longer  than 
the  outside  length  of  the  box.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  and 
4  in.  longer  than  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 


100 


BOX  FURNITURE 


Cleats.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1  in.  wide,  and  length  equal  to 
the  width  of  the  door. 

Shelf  Cleats.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  and  length 
equal  to  the  inside  depth  of  the  box. 

Mirror.     1  flat-framed  mirror. 

Hardware.  1  pair  1%  in.  brass  hinges  (butts).  2  pairs  4  in. 
tee  hinges. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  4  inches  longer  than  the  outside  length 
of  the  box.  Remove  the  cover  and  one  end  from  the 
box.  Put  on  the  shelf  cleats  at  the  proper  height  to 
make  room  for  the  pail,  pitcher,  and  bowl,  leaving  at 
least  1  inch,  or  more,  between  the  top  of  the  bowl  and  the 
under  side  of  the  hinged  top  to  clear  the  mirror.  Fit  and 
nail  in  the  shelves.  Lay  the  box  on  its  side  and  put  on 


the  legs.  Turn 
and  fit  and 
The  hinged  top 
two  pieces,  the 
being  6  inches 
piece  on,  letting 
the  face  of  the 
at  the  sides  and 
wide  piece  of 
and  place  a 
front  edge  to 
closed.  Secure 
the  under  side 


it  on  its  back 
hang  the  doors, 
will  be  made  in 
narrow  piece 
wide.  Nail  this 
it  project  over 
legs  \Yz  inches 
rear.  Hang  the 
the  lid  to  this, 
cleat  under  the 
hold  the  doors 
the  mirror  to 
of  the  lid. 


BOX  FUBNJITUBJ5 


DESK  CHAIR 


Illustration  40 


Figures  1  and  2 


The  seat  is  formed  of  a  box  with  a  hinged  cover. 
Midway  of  the  depth  inside  is  a  sliding  shelf  upon  two 
cleats  extending  the  length  of  the  box,  which  provides 
space  for  large  paper  sheets,  drawings,  etc. 

Requirements : 

Body.  1  Condensed-milk  Box  (about  7*4  in-  deep,  13  in.  wide, 
19%  in.  long). 

Cover.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  1^  in.  wide,  length  equal  to  side 
length  of  the  box.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  width  1%  in.  less  than  the 
width  of  the  box,  length  equal  to  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Shelf.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  width  equal  to  one-half  the  in- 
side length  of  the  box,  and  length  equal  to  the  inside  width  of  the 
box. 

Cleats.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  1*6  in.  wide,  length  equal  to  the 
inside  length  of  the  box. 

Legs.  4  Strips  ^  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  27  in.  long.  4  Strips 
%  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  27  in.  long. 


BOX  FUBNITUBE 

Arms.     2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2%  in.  wide,  16  in.  long. 
Back  Bar.     2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2%  in.  wide,  21%  in.  long. 
Hardware.     2  1%  in.  brass  butts. 


Construction : 

Make  the  legs  27  inches  long.  Remove  the  cover.  Nail 
the  shelf  cleats  on  the  inside  sides  of  the  box,  keeping  the 
top  of  the  cleats  3  inches  from  the  bottom.  Fit  the  shelf 
so  as  to  slide  readily  upon  the  cleats.  Bore  a  hole  %  inch 
in  diameter,  %  of  an  inch  from  the  edge  at  the  center; 
insert  the  finger  in  this  hole  to  move  the  shelf.  Nail  the 
narrow  cover  strip  along  the  side  on  top,  keeping  its 
outside  edge  even  with  the  outside  edge  of  the  box.  Turn 
the  box  on  its  side  and  nail  on  the  legs,  allowing  them  to 
project  10  inches  above  the  top  of  the  box  with  the  seat 
cover  on.  Stand  the  chair  upon  its  legs,  right  side  up. 
Nail  the  arms  to  the  top  of  the  legs,  allowing  their  ends 
to  project  2  inches  over  the  face  of  the  legs  in  front,  and 
their  outside  edges  to  project  %  inch  over  the  outside 
face  of  leg  on  the  sides,  the  rear  end  of  arm  being  even 
with  the  rear  face  of  the  rear  leg.  Nail  one  of  the  back 
bar  strips  across  the  rear  legs,  keeping  its  top  edge  even 
with  the  top  of  the  leg.  Set  the  other  back  bar  strip, 
flat  side  up,  directly  behind  the  arm  ends,  and  nail  to  the 
other  half  of  back  bar  already  in  place.  Fit  and  hang 
the  seat  and  set  the  shelf  in  place. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


103 


QUADRUPLE  WRITING-DESK 

Illustration  41 


Figure  1 


At  this  desk  four  persons  may  work,  each  having  in- 
dividual narrow  and  wide  closets,  with  shelves  for 
stationery  and  book  compartments. 


Requirements : 

Bodies.     8  Soap  Boxes  (8  in.  deep,  1314  in.  wide,  27%  in.  long). 

Shelves.  27  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  length  and  width  equal  to  the 
inside  width  and  depth  of  the  box. 

Top.     1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  52  in.  square  (five  boards  wide). 

Tie  Strips.     4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wide,  52  in.  long. 

Corner  Trim.  16  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1*4  in.  wide,  length  equal 
to  the  outside  length  of  the  box.  16  Strips  y2  in.  thick,  1%  in. 
wide,  length  equal  to  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Facing  Strips.  8  Strips  */fc  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  length  equal 
to  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 


104  BOX  FUENITUEE 

Doors.     Made  from  the  covers  and  sides  removed. 
Door  Cleats.     8  Strips  %  in.  thick,  iy2  in.  wide,  10  in.  long. 
Hardware.     16  1%  in.  hinges  (butts)  and  screws,    8  brass  pull- 
knobs.     8  brass  buttons. 

Construction : 

Make  the  corner  trim  as  long  as  the  outside  length  of 
the  box.  Remove  the  covers  from  four  of  the  boxes  and 
one  side  from  each  of  the  other  four  boxes.  Fit  and  nail 
the  shelves  in  the  first  four  boxes,  placing  the  lower  one 
6  inches  from  one  end  of  the  box.  Space  the  other  five 
evenly  between  the  first  shelf  and  the  other  end  of  the 
box,  giving  a  space  of  about  3  inches  between  them.  Use 
iy2  incn  brads  to  fasten  the  shelves,  driving  them  from 
the  outside  through  into  the  edge  and  ends  of  the 
shelves.  Fit  and  nail  the  shelves  in  the  other  four 
boxes  from  which  the  sides  were  removed,  placing  the 
lower  shelf  14  inches  from  one  end  of  the  box,  and  space 
the  other  two  evenly  between  this  first  shelf  and  the 
other  end  of  the  box. 

Place  one  of  the  last  four  boxes  bottom  down  on  the 
floor,  with  the  long  compartment  at  the  right-hand  end 
as  the  open  side  is  faced.  Place  one  of  the  first  four 
boxes,  bottom  down  (open  compartments  facing  up), 
upon  it,  the  larger  end  compartment  being  at  the  right- 
hand  end  as  the  open  side  of  the  lower  box  is  still  faced. 
Match  their  edges  and  nail  them  together  by  driving  the 
nails  between  the  shelves,  through  the  bottom  of  the 
top  box  and  into  the  top  of  the  lower  box.  Use  flat-head 
wire  nails,  1%  inches  long,  and  clinch  their  points  in 
the  lower  box.  Put  the  corner  trim  and  the  facing  strips 
on.  Join  the  other  six  boxes  together  in  pairs  in  the 
same  way.  Set  each  pair  of  boxes  about  20  inches  apart, 


BOX  FURNITURE  105 

forming  a  square,  all  of  the  closets  of  a  kind  at  the  left 
hand  as  you  face  any  side  of  the  square.  Miter  each  end 
of  the  four  tie  strips;  lay  each  one  flat  side  down  across 
two  pairs  of  closets,  keeping  its  ends  even  with  the  out- 
side end  face  of  each  pair  and  its  outer  face  even  with 
the  front  face  of  each  pair,  forming  a  perfect  square. 
Match  their  mitered  ends  and  nail  them  to  each  pair  of 
closets.  These  strips  hold  the  sets  of  closets  together  and 
the  proper  distance  apart,  and  upon  them  is  laid  the 
top.  Make  the  top,  planing  the  edges  of  the  boards  true 
and  straight.  Lay  them  upon  the  tie  strips.  Put  hot 
glue  on  their  edges,  and  press  them  tightly  together  and 
nail  to  the  tie  strips.  The  top  should  project  1l/2  inches 
over  the  outer  edge  of  the  tie  strips  on  each  side.  Drive 
the  nail  heads  slightly  below  the  upper  surface  of  the  top 
and  plane  smooth  the  entire  top  surface  of  the  top. 


CHAPTER  VII 

THE  BOX  TURNED  UPON  ITS  SIDE,  WITH  THE  COVER 
AND  SOMETIMES  THE  SIDES  REMOVED 


. 


Bop's  IRoom 

M        BOY'S  DELIGHT          PHOTOGRAPHIC-MATERIAL  STAND  •• 

n                                           BOY'S  WORK-TABLE  jjj 

•               BEDROOM  WINDOW-SEAT                    MUSIC-STAND  — 


I™ 

CoZor  Scheme  : 

Green. 
•f^  Tan. 

•^   Woodwork: 

•J  Moss  green. 

•  ^  Furniture  : 

L;  Moss  green. 


BOY'S  BOOK-  AND  GAME-TABLE 


IIFoZZs: 
Tan,  with  motif  stenciled  in  moss  green.  •• 

•  Ceiling:  J. 

Tan. 

1^1     Hangings  and  Pillows  : 
Tan-colored  denim,  with  motif  stenciled  in  same  color  " 
as  furniture. 

|«| 
•     Curtains: 

Muslin  of  tan  color,  with  motif  stenciled  in  same     -— 

•  ^  shade  as  furniture.  ji 

^|     Floor: 

•  ^  Stained  same  as  furniture  or  color  of  the  walls  ;  rugs   J*  I 

olive  green  with  crimson. 

Plants  : 

•^  Vines  and  growing  plants  with  either  yellow  or  crim-     JJ 

Imt  son  blossoms.  ^ 

Ir  ^1 

H±i  lit  i±i  \±\  i±  ±i  i±i  i±i  lii  i  —  n 


arpi  171  1~.«  171  17  71  171 


CHAPTER  VII  l 


|i  Illustration  43 

JJ  FIREPLACE  BOOKCASE 

J7          Sixteen   boxes    placed    on    sides.      Four   rest   upon    a    m"m 
|;«  frame.     Covers  removed,  otherwise  left  intact.  Tl 

P     Illustration  43  Ti 

I"  SIMPLE  BOOKCASE 

mm         Three  boxes  placed  on  sides.    Covers  of  all  and  one  side     mm 

•  «^  of  two  removed.    Legs  and  false  top  added.  « I 

p.    Illustration  44  M 

1^.  MUSIC-STAND  tel 

•  •  •• 

••          Three  boxes  placed  top  side  up.    One  side  of  each  and     *" 
covers   of   two    removed.      Shelves,    legs,    and   false    top 
added. 


mm     Illustration  45 

•  ^  OFFICE  FILE 

mm  Five  boxes  placed  top  side  up.  One  side  of  each  and  •• 
mm  covers  of  four  removed.  Shelves,  legs,  and  false  top  •• 

IT  added-  -y 

•  Illustration  46  •• 

|"»  500-VOLUME  BOOKCASE  "•§ 

Fifteen  boxes  placed  on  sides.     Covers  of  all  and  one 
\     side  of  twelve  removed.     Corner  trim,  facing  strips,  and 
false  top  added. 

•  1^  Illustration  47  Hj 

BOOKCASE   WITH  DRAWERS 

••  Five  boxes  placed  on  sides.  Covers  of  all  and  one  side  •• 
lit  of  four  removed.  Three  smaller  boxes  used  as  drawers.  mSi 
mm  Partitions,  corner  trim,  and  false  top  added,  « 

jL  41 


a.-pi  17.1  17.1  171  17.  T.I  1.7.1  17.1  171  Kpj: 

y 

^     Illustration  48  mm 

•  ^  BOY  JS  BOOK-  AND  GAME-TABLE  Jj 

••          Four  boxes  placed  top  side  up.     Two  boxes  placed  on     •• 
••     end.    Covers  removed.    Shelves,  legs,  and  false  top  added.    £• 

Ir  "• 

••     Illustration  49 

••  WALL   DESK  J| 

Box  placed  on  side.    Cover  removed  and  hinged  as  lid.     •• 
Partition  and  false  top  added.  mm 

Jf   Illustration  50  "U 

—  BOOKCASE  DESK  fc- 

|J»        An  adaptation  of  the  Wall  Desk  and  the  Simple  Book-  --| 

••     case  in  combination.  •• 

0-  i! 

I  -0 

0-  l1 

fr  -0 

o-  -o 

[r  -0 

ij  •:] 

[r  -0 

[L  4l 

\  i±  ±1  i±i  i±i  iii  tin 


\\ 


112 


BOX  FURNITUKE 


FIREPLACE  BOOKCASE 


Illustration  42 


Figures  1  and  2 


This  was  set  up,  inclosing  the  fireplace  just  as  shown, 
in  a  steam-heated  studio  in  the  art  quarter  in  New  York 
City  and  was  extremely  useful  and  convenient. 

Requirements : 

Body.  16  Canned-corn  Boxes  (about  10 14  in.  deep,  11%  in. 
wide,  15%  in.  long). 

Bridge  Frame.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  and  length 
equal  to  four  times  the  outside  length  of  the  box.  2  Strips  %  in. 
thick,  1%  in.  wide,  and  length  1%  in.  shorter  than  the  outside 
depth  of  the  box  with  cover  removed. 

Construction : 

Remove  the  covers  from  all  the  boxes.  With  the  strips 
make  a  bridge  to  support  the  two  boxes  which  are  di- 


BOX  FURNITURE 


113 


rectly  over  the  fireplace.  Place  the  two  long  strips  on 
their  edge  on  the  floor,  and  between  their  ends  place  the 
short  strips  on  their  edges,  and  fasten  together  with  two 
small  wire  nails  driven  through  the  side  of  the  long 
strips  into  the  ends  of  the  short  ones.  Place  two  boxes 
on  their  sides,  one  upon  the  other,  on  each  side  of  the 
fireplace.  Lay  the  frame  across  these  boxes,  their  outer 
ends  being  even  with  the  ends  of  the  frame.  Place  four 
boxes  upon  their  sides  on  the  frame.  The  other  two  tiers 
of  four  boxes  each  are  placed  at  each  end  as  shown,  set 
back  so  that  their  front  faces  are  a  little  forward  of 
the  rear  face  of  the  other  boxes.  Five  semicircular 
photographs  of  "The  Evolution  of  the  Book,"  by  John 
Alexander,  were  framed  and  hung  above. 


114 


BOX  FUENITUKE 


SIMPLE  BOOKCASE 


Illustration  43 


Figures  1  and  2 


Requirements : 

Body.  3  Carbonite  Boxes  (about  10  in.  deep,  12  in.  wide,  31  in. 
long). 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  l1/^  in.  wide,  5  in.  longer  than 
three  times  the  outside  width  of  the  box.  4  Strips  %  in-  thick, 
2  in.  wide,  5  in.  longer  than  three  times  the  outside  width  of  the 
box. 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wider  than  the  outside  depth  of 
the  box  with  the  cover  removed,  and  3  in.  longer  than  the  outside 
length  of  the  box. 

Facing  Strips.  6  Strips  ^>  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  about  7  in. 
long. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  5  inches  longer  than  three  times  the 
outside  width  of  the  box.  Remove  the  covers.  Turn 


BOX  FUENITUEE 


115 


one  box  on  its  side  and  remove  the  upper  side.  Do  the 
same  with  the  second  box.  Place  the  second  box  on  its 
side  upon  the  open  side  of  the  first  box,  keeping  the  open 
side  of  the  second  box  at  the  top.  Upon  this  open  side 
of  the  second  box  place  the  third  box,  keeping  all  the 
cover  openings  facing  the  same  way.  Fasten  the  three 
boxes  together  by  nailing  two  strips  placed  vertically 
across  the  bottoms  about  2  feet  apart,  to  hold  them  to- 
gether while  the  legs  are  put  on.  Turn  all  three  boxes 
on  their  backs  and  nail  on  the  legs,  keeping  their  upper 
ends  even  with  the  top  side  of  the  last  box  added.  Turn 
the  stand  upon  its  legs  and  nail  on  the  top,  allowing  its 
edges  to  project  1  inch  over  the  outside  face  of  the  legs 
all  around.  Put  on  the  facing  strips  at  the  ends  and 
remove  the  temporary  strips  from  the  back  of  the  stand. 


116 


BOX  FURNITURE 


MUSIC-STAND 


Illustration  44 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.  3  Condensed-milk  Boxes  (about  7*4  in.  deep,  13  in.  wide, 
19%  in.  long). 

Shelves.  3  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  by  the  inside  width  and  length 
of  the  box. 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  2%  in.  wider  and  3  in.  longer  than 
the  outside  width  and  length  of  the  box. 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1*4  in.  wide,  27  in.  long.  4  Strips 
%  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  27  in.  long. 

Facing  Strips.  6  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  about  10  in. 
long.  Use  the  covers  and  sides  removed  in  making  the  shelves. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  27  inches  long.  Remove  the  covers 
from  two  of  the  boxes.  Turn  one  box  on  its  side  and 
remove  the  upper  side.  Do  the  same  with  the  second 
and  third  boxes.  Place  the  second  box,  bottom  down, 


BOX  FURNITURE  117 

upon  the  open  top  of  the  first  box,  keeping  the  open  top 
of  the  second  box  facing  up.  Upon  this  open  top  of  the 
second  box  place  the  third  box,  keeping  all  the  open  sides 
facing  the  same  way.  Fasten  the  three  boxes  together  by 
nailing  two  strips  placed  vertically  across  the  rear 
sides,  about  15  inches  apart,  to  hold  them  together  while 
the  legs  are  put  on.  Turn  all  three  boxes  on  their  re- 
verse sides  and  nail  on  the  legs,  keeping  their  upper 
ends  even  with  the  top  of  the  last  box  added.  Turn  the 
stand  upon  its  legs  and  nail  on  the  top,  allowing  its 
edges  to  project  1  inch  over  the  outside  face  of  the  legs 
all  around.  Put  the  facing  strips  on  the  ends  of  the 
stand  and  remove  the  temporary  strips  from  the  back. 
Fit  the  shelves  in  place,  one  in  the  lower,  one  in  the 
middle,  and  one  in  the  top  compartment,  using  care  to 
have  them  equal  heights  at  the  ends,  so  they  will  all  be 
parallel.  Fasten  the  shelves  in  place  with  1%  inch  brads 
driven  from  the  outside,  through  the  ends  of  the  stand, 
into  the  ends  of  the  shelves. 

NOTE.  If  two  shelves,  instead  of  one,  are  placed  in 
each  of  the  upper  boxes,  as  shown  in  the  Boy's  Room 
Interior,  sheet  music  can  be  held  more  conveniently  than 
if  made  as  herein  described. 


118 


BOX  FUKNITUEE 


OFFICE  FILE 


Illustration  45 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.  5  Condensed-milk  Boxes  (about  7%  in.  deep,  13  in. 
wide,  19%  in.  long). 

Shelves.  5  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  by  the  inside  width  and  length 
of  the  box. 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wider  and  3  in.  longer  than 
the  outside  width  and  length  of  the  box. 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  l^  in,  wide,  38  in.  long.  4  Strips 
%  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  38  in.  long. 

Facing  Strips.  10  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  about  10 
in.  long.  Use  the  covers  and  sides  removed,  in  making  the  shelves. 


BOX  FUKNITURE  119 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  38  inches  long.  Remove  the  covers  from 
four  of  the  boxes.  Turn  one  box  on  its  side  and  remove 
its  upper  side.  Do  the  same  with  the  second,  third, 
fourth,  and  fifth  boxes.  Place  the  second  box,  bottom 
down,  upon  the  open  top  of  the  first  box,  keeping  the 
open  top  of  the  second  box  facing  up,  and  place  the  third 
upon  the  second,  and  the  fourth  upon  the  third,  and  the 
fifth  upon  the  fourth,  in  like  manner,  keeping  all  the 
open  sides  facing  the  same  way.  Fasten  the  five  boxes 
together  by  nailing  two  strips  placed  vertically  across 
the  rear  sides  about  15  inches  apart  to  hold  them  to- 
gether while  the  legs  are  put  on.  Turn  all  five  boxes  on 
their  reverse  sides  and  nail  on  the  legs,  keeping  their 
upper  ends  even  with  the  top  of  the  last  box  added. 
Turn  the  stand  upon  its  legs  and  nail  on  the  top,  allow- 
ing its  edges  to  project  1  inch  over  the  outside  face  of 
the  legs  all  around.  Put  the  facing  strips  on  the  ends 
of  the  stand  and  remove  the  temporary  strips  from  the 
back. 

NOTE.  If  two  shelves,  instead  of  one,  are  placed  in 
each  of  the  two  upper  boxes,  as  shown  in  the  Office  In- 
terior, sheet  stationery,  in  a  limited  quantity,  can  be 
more  conveniently  accommodated  than  if  made  as  herein 
described. 


120 


BOX  FURNITURE 


500-VOLUME  BOOKCASE 


Illustration  46 


Figure  1 


Made  from  fifteen  silk  boxes,  with  their  covers  re- 
moved, twelve  of  them  having  also  one  side  removed. 
Provides  space  for  five  hundred  volumes. 

Requirements : 

Body.  15  Silk  Boxes  (about  7%  in.  deep,  7%  in.  wide,  35  in. 
long). 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wider  than  the  outside  depth 
of  the  box  with  the  cover  removed,  and  9  in.  longer  than  the  box. 
1  Piece  %  in:  thick,  2  in.  wider  than  the  outside  depth  of  the  box 
with  the  cover  removed,  and  9  in.  longer  than  twice  the  length  of 
the  box. 

Facing  Strips.  3  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  and  length 
equal  to  about  five  times  the  width  of  the  box.  10  Strips  %  in. 
thick,  2  in.  wide,  and  length  about  3  in.  shorter  than  the  depth  of 
the  box. 

Corner  Trim.  7  Strips  y%  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  and  length 
equal  to  about  five  times  the  width  of  the  box.  7  Strips  %  in. 
thick,  2  in.  wide,  and  length  equal  to  about  five  times  the  width  of 
the  box. 


BOX  FUKNITURE  121 

Construction : 

Make  the  corner  trim  about  five  times  longer  than  the 
width  of  the  box.  Remove  the  covers  from  all  the  boxes 
and  also  one  side  from  twelve  of  them.  Place  on  their 
sides  one  upon  the  other,  each  with  its  open  side  up,  four 
of  the  boxes  from  which  both  a  cover  and  one  side  have 
been  removed,  and  upon  these  four  place  one  also  on  its 
side  from  which  the  cover  only  has  been  removed,  keep- 
ing the  top  or  cover  openings  all  facing  the  same  way. 
Fasten  the  five  boxes  together  by,  first,  putting  the  rear 
corner  trim  at  each  end,  then  the  front  corner  trim  at 
one  end  only.  As  the  other  end  is  to  connect  with  the 
other  two  sections  of  the  rack,  the  corner  trim  at  that 
end  will  be  put  on  the  reverse  way  after  the  sections  are 
ready  to  join  together.  Therefore  a  facing  strip  will 
be  placed  on  the  end  face  of  each  section  at  the  corner 
end.  The  front  edge  of  the  facing  strip  is  to  be  placed 
even  with  the  front  edge  of  the  rack  and  nailed  to  the 
ends  of  the  boxes. 

The  double  section  of  the  rack  is  built  up  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  single  section  just  described.  The  ends 
of  the  two  sections  forming  the  double  section  are  placed 
against  each  other  and  joined  by  nailing  together,  a 
facing  strip  being  placed  over  the  joint  in  both  front  and 
rear,  two  pieces  of  corner  trim  at  the  outer  end  and  one 
piece  of  corner  trim  and  a  facing  strip  at  the  inner  or 
corner  end,  the  same  as  that  of  the  single  section.  Place 
the  two  sections  at  right  angles  to  each  other  and  bring 
the  front  face  corners  together.  Set  the  corner  trim  the 
reverse  way  in  the  angle  and  nail  it  to  the  front  faces  of 
both  sections  to  join  and  hold  the  sections  together.  Put 
the  short  facing  strips  on  the  outer  ends  and  fit  and  nail 


122  BOX  FURNITURE 

the  top  on,  keeping  its  rear  edge  even  with  the  outer 
face  of  the  trim  and  allowing  its  ends  and  front  edge  to 
project  1  inch  over  the  front  face  of  the  trim,  with  a 
miter-joint  at  the  corner. 


BOX  FURNITUKE 


123 


BOOKCASE  WITH  DRAWERS 

Illustration  47 


Figure  1 


Requirements  : 

Body.     5  Umbrella  Boxes  (10  in.  square,  44  in.  long). 

Drawers.  1  Box  (about  9  in.  deep,  9^  in.  wide,  17%  in.  long). 
2  Boxes  (about  9  in.  deep,  Q^  in.  wide,  12  in.  long). 

Corner  Trim.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  l1/^  in.  wide,  length  equal  to 
five  times  the  outside  width  of  the  box.  4  Strips  %  iu.  thick,  2  in. 
wide,  and  length  equal  to  five  times  the  outside  width  of  the  box. 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wider  than  the  outside  depth 
of  the  box  with  the  cover  removed,  3  in.  longer  than  the  outside 
length  of  the  box. 

Partition.  2  Pieces  a/2  in-  thick,  width  equal  to  the  inside  depth 
of  the  box,  and  length  equal  to  the  inside  width  of  the  box. 

Facing  Strips.  10  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  about  7  in. 
long. 

Hardware.     3  drawer  pulls. 

Construction : 

Make  the  corner  trim  five  times  the  outside  width  of 
the  box.  Remove  the  covers.  Turn  one  large  box  on  its 


124  BOX  FURNITURE 

side  and  remove  the  upper  side.  Do  the  same  with  the 
second,  third,  and  fourth  large  boxes.  Place  the  second 
box  on  its  side  upon  the  open  side  of  the  first  box,  keep- 
ing the  open  side  of  the  second  box  at  the  top,  and  place 
the  third  upon  the  second,  and  the  fourth  upon  the  third, 
in  like  manner.  Upon  the  open  side  of  the  fourth 
box  place  the  fifth  box  on  its  side  without  having  re- 
moved either  side,  keeping  all  the  cover  or  top  openings 
facing  the  same  way.  Fasten  the  five  boxes  together  by 
nailing  two  strips  placed  vertically  across  the  bottoms 
about  2  feet  apart,  to  hold  them  together  while  the  cor- 
ner trim  is  put  on.  Turn  all  five  boxes  on  the  reverse 
side  and  nail  on  the  corner  trim,  keeping  their  upper 
ends  even  with  the  top  side  of  the  last  box  added.  Turn 
the  stand  right  side  up  and  nail  on  the  top,  allowing  its 
edges  to  project  1  inch  over  the  outside  face  of  the  trim 
all  around.  Place  the  two  smallest  boxes  in  the  lower 
compartment,  one  at  each  end,  and  set  the  partitions  in 
place,  one  against  the  side  of  each  drawer,  and  nail  them 
fast.  Fit  in  the  middle  drawer  and  fasten  the  drawer 
pulls  on.  Put  on  the  facing  strips  at  the  ends  and  re- 
move the  temporary  strips  from  the  back. 

NOTE.  In  the  illustration  one  drawer  is  removed, 
showing  a  strip  against  the  end,  the  thickness  of  the 
corner  trim  projection  over  the  face  of  the  compartment, 
which  acts  as  a  guide  for  the  drawer.  It  is  the  same  at 
each  end  of  the  stand. 


BOX  FUKNITUBE 


BOY'S  BOOK-  AND  GAME-TABLE 
Illustration  48  Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.  6  Starch  Boxes  (about  10%  in.  deep,  13%  in.  wide,  22 
in.  long). 

Top.  1  Piece  *£  in.  thick,  6  in.  wider  than  the  outside  length  of 
the  box,  and  6  in.  longer  than  three  times  the  outside  width  of  the 
box. 

Shelves.  12  Pieces  %  in-  thick,  width  %  in.  less  than  one  half 
the  inside  width  of  the  box,  and  length  equal  to  the  inside  depth 
of  the  box. 

Partitions.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  width  equal  to  the  inside 
depth  of  the  box,  and  length  equal  to  the  inside  length  of  the  box. 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  26  in.  long.  4  Strips 
%  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  26  in.  long. 

Facing  Strip  Legs.     4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  26  in. 

long- 
Horizontal  Facing  Strips.     2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide, 
and  1%  in.  shorter  than  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 


126  BOX  FUEN1TUEE 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  26  inches  long.  Remove  one  side  from 
four  of  the  boxes.  Lay  one  of  these  boxes  on  the  floor, 
cover  side  up,  and  place  a  second  box  upon  it,  having 
their  open  sides  facing  the  same  way.  Match  their 
edges  and  nail  them  together.  Do  the  same  with  the 
other  two  boxes.  Turn  them  on  their  sides,  the  open 
compartment  down.  Remove  the  covers  from  the  two 
remaining  boxes  and  fasten  one  partition  in  each,  length- 
wise of  the  box.  Fit  and  nail  in  the  shelves.  Place  one 
box  on  its  side  upon  the  pair,  with  its  open  compartment 
facing  the  same  way  as  the  ends  of  the  pair.  Match 
their  edges  and  nail  to  the  pair,  keeping  the  edges  even 
with  the  outside  face  of  the  adjoining  ends.  Place  and 
nail  the  other  box  at  the  other  ends,  having  its  open 
compartment  facing  the  same  way  as  the  other  ends  of 
the  pair,  or  directly  opposite  that  of  the  other  box  having 
shelves.  There  will  be  a  small  space  between  the  side 
compartment  boxes  which  will  be  hidden  by  the  top. 
Upon  the  last  two  boxes  place  the  other  pair,  with  their 
open  sides  facing  up,  and  nail  them  to  the  others.  Nail 
on  the  legs,  also  the  facing  strip  legs,  allowing  their 
inner  edges  to  project  y2  inch  over  the  inner  side  faces  of 
the  shelved  compartments.  Nail  on  the  horizontal  fac- 
ing strips  between  the  facing  strip  legs  and  the  corner 
legs.  Each  end  of  the  table  has  two  open  compartments. 
Both  sides  are  also  alike,  each  having  a  shelved  compart- 
ment as  shown.  Fit  and  nail  on  the  top,  allowing  an 
even  projection  of  2%  inches  over  the  outside  face  of 
the  leg  on  all  sides. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


127 


WALL  DESK 


Illustration  49 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.     1  Box  (about  8%  in.  deep,  15%  in.  wide,  30  in.  long). 

Drawer.  1  Five-pound  Candy  Box  (about  3%  in.  deep,  7  in. 
wide,  13  in.  long). 

Shelves.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick.  One  may  be  made  from  the 
side  removed. 

Partition.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  width  equal  to  the  depth  of 
the  drawer,  length  equal  to  the  inside  depth  of  the  box. 

Lid.     Made  from  the  cover. 

Cleats.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  1^  in.  wide,  length  equal  to  the 
width  of  the  lid. 

Hardware.  2  Pieces  of  brass  sash  chain,  each  about  10  in.  long. 
4  brass  screws  ^  in.  long.  2  1%  in.  butts  and  screws.  1  small 
brass  hook  and  screw-eye.  1  small  brass  pull-knob. 

Construction : 

Remove  the  cover  and  one  side.  Cut  off  the  ends  of 
the  side  which  has  been  removed  to  make  its  length  the 
same  as  the  inside  length  of  the  box.  Plane  one  side 
edge  to  make  its  width  the  same  as  the  inside  depth  of 


128          .  BOX  FUKNITURE 

the  box.  This  side  piece  will  make  the  shelf.  Make  an- 
other shelf  the  same  size.  Set  one  shelf  in  2  inches  from 
the  open  side  edges  and  fasten  it.  Turn  the  box  on  its 
open  side  and  place  the  small  box,  which  is  to  become  the 
drawer,  on  the  center  of  the  shelf.  Place  the  other  shelf 
upon  the  drawer  and  fasten  it.  Set  a  partition  on  each 
side  of  and  against  the  drawer  and  fasten  them  to  the 
shelves.  Turn  the  box  on  its  reverse  side,  and  it  will  be 
in  its  natural  position  as  it  will  hang  on  the  wall.  Re- 
duce the  width  of  the  cover,  making  it  equal  to  the 
height  of  the  top  face  of  the  upper  shelf  from  the  bottom 
face  of  the  lower  side.  Put  a  cleat  across  each  end  and 
the  full  width  of  the  lid,  keeping  its  edge  even  with  the 
end,  and  hang  it,  placing  the  hinges  on  the  edge  faces. 
The  top  edge  of  the  lid  when  the  desk  is  closed  should 
be  even  with  the  upper  side  of  the  top  shelf.  Fasten  the 
chains  by  a  screw  (passed  through  a  link  at  one  end), 
secured  to  the  inside  face  of  the  top  of  the  desk.  The 
other  end  of  the  chain  is  to  be  fastened  in  a  similar  man- 
ner to  the  lid  %  inch  from  the  side  edge  and  4  inches 
from  the  top  edge  of  the  lid,  the  cleats  being  on  the 
outside  face.  Screw  the  pull-knob  to  the  center  of  the 
face  of  the  drawer. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


129 


BOOKCASE  DESK 


Illustration  50 


Figures  1  and  2 


Made  from  three  carbonite  boxes  and  one  cigar  box. 
Space  for  books,  magazines,  writing  equipment,  and 
desk. 


Requirements : 

Body.  3  Carbonite  Boxes  (about  10  in.  deep,  12  in.  wide,  31  in. 
long).  1  Cigar  Box. 

Legs.  4  Pieces  ^>  in.  thick,  1^  in.  wide,  5  in.  longer  than 
three  times  the  outside  width  of  the  box.  4  Pieces  ^  in.  thick, 
2  in.  wide,  5  in.  longer  than  three  times  the  outside  width  of  the 
box. 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wider  than  the  outside  depth  of 
the  box  with  cover  removed,  3  in,  longer  than  the  outside  length 
of  the  box. 


130  BOX  FUKNITURE 

Shelf.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  4%  in.  wide,  by  the  inside  length  of 
the  box. 

Partition.     7  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  4%  in.  wide,  7  in.  long. 

Lid.  1  Piece  %  in-  thick,  width  equal  to  the  outside  width  of 
the  box,  by  3  in.  shorter  than  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Cleats.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  and  length  equal  to 
the  width  of  the  lid. 

Facing  Strips.  6  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  and  3  in. 
shorter  than  the  outside  depth  of  the  box  with  the  cover  removed. 

Hardware.  2  2  in.  butts  and  screws.  1  medium  pull-knob.  1 
small  pull-knob.  1  button.  2  pieces  of  brass  sash  chain,  each 
about  10  in.  long.  4  brass  screws  %  in.  long. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  5  inches  longer  than  three  times  the 
outside  width  of  the  box.  Remove  the  covers  from  all 
the  boxes.  Turn  one  box  on  its  side  and  remove  the 
upper  side.  Do  the  same  with  the  second  box.  Place 
the  second  box  on  its  side  upon  the  open  side  of  the  first 
box,  keeping  the  open  side  of  the  second  box  at  the  top. 
Upon  this  open  side  of  the  second  box  place  the  third 
box,  keeping  all  the  openings  facing  the  same  way. 
Fasten  the  three  boxes  together  by  nailing  two  strips 
placed  vertically  across  the  bottoms  about  2  feet  apart  to 
hold  them  together  while  the  legs  are  put  on.  Turn  all 
three  boxes  on  the  reverse  side  and  nail  on  the  legs,  keep- 
ing their  upper  ends  even  with  the  top  of  the  last  box 
added.  Turn  the  stand  upon  its  legs  and  nail  on  the 
top,  allowing  its  edges  to  project  1  inch  over  the  outside 
face  of  the  legs  .all  around.  Remove  the  temporary  strips 
from  the  back.  Cut  and  nail  the  facing  strips  on  each 
end,  keeping  the  bottom  edge  of  the  lower  ones  even 
with  the  under  side  of  the  body. 

Fit  and  nail  in  the  shelf,  keeping  7  inches  height  of 


BOX  FUKNITUEE 


131 


space  above  it.  Set  the  cigar  box  at  the  center  of  the 
shelf  and  place  and  nail  the  partitions  which  are  to  sup- 
port it,  then  place  and  nail  the  short  shelf,  using  small 
brads.  Place  the  other  partitions  at  such  places  as  will 
be  most  convenient. 

Put  a  cleat  across  each  end  and  the  full  width  of  the 
lid,  keeping  its  edge  even  with  the  end  of  the  lid.  Fit  the 
lid  in  place  and  hang  it,  and  screw  on  the  pull-knob  and 
the  button. 

Fasten  the  chains  with  a  screw  (passed  through  a  link 
at  one  end)  to  the  inside  face  of  the  top,  about  1  inch 
from  the  end.  The  other  end  of  the  chain  is  to  be 
fastened  in  a  similar  manner  to  the  lid. 


CHAPTER  VIII 

ONE  OR  MORE  BOXES  SUPPORTED  ONE 

ABOVE  THE  OTHER  BY  EITHER 

CORNER  TRIM  OR  LEGS 


Scbool^room 


REFERENCE  STAND 

••        NATURE-STUDY  STAND  TEACHER'S  DESK        •• 

.'!                                             UPRIGHT  CLOCK  '•'. 

I!              BOOK  AND  KNICKKNACK  BRACKET      SCRAP-BOX  j; 
j«                                            NEST  OF  BENCHES 

UMBRELLA-  AND  OVERSHOE-STAND 

« •  •• 

II     Color  Scheme:  H 

•  •              Dark  oak.  •• 

Light  brown. 

•  •  •• 

Woodwork : 

Dark  oak. 

•  •  •• 

» «      , ,  « § 

Furniture: 

•  •  •  • 

••  Dark  oak,  with  motif  stenciled  in  same  color  as  walls.     •• 

*•     Walls: 

*•             Light  biown,  with  motif  stenciled  in  same  color  as     •  • 

. ,              woodwork.  , , 

•  •  •  t 

•  •     Ceiling :  •  • 

.,             Same  color  as  walls,  but,  lighter  shade.  .. 

•  •  •  • 

•  •     Curtains:  •• 

Unbleached  cotton  cloth,  and  motif  stenciled  with  the 
II  light  and  dark  browns  used  on  the  walls  and  wood-     T! 

work.  .. 

•1  •• 

••     Floor:  •• 

mt             Stained  dark  brown  and  finished  with  shellac.  .. 

•  •  •• 

••     Plants:  •• 
Evergreens,  growing  vines,  plants,  and  cut  flowers  of 
one  color  or  varying  hues  of  same;   for  instance,  a     •• 

, .              harmony  of  cream  or  orange  or  red.  . . 

•  •  •• 

••      ' •     -•     ••     -«     »•      »«      ••     »«    v    »«      ••      ••     ••      •«     ••      •«  »•      •• 

••  ••  ••  ..  ••  ••  ••  ..  ••  •  .«  ..  ••  ••  ••  ••  ••  ••  •• 


*  • 


CHAPTER  VIII 
•  • 
..  ^ 

. .     Illustration  51 

ODDS-AND-ENDS    STAND 

l\          Three  plant-boxes  in  combination.    Legs  added. 
••     Illustration  52 

•  •  ROLLING  SOILED-DISH   STAND 

Two  boxes  placed  top  side  up.     Covers  removed.     Cor 
II     ner  trim,  casters,  and  removable  false  top  added.  '.'. 

•  •  •• 
••      Illustration  53                                                                                •• 

••  FLOWER-  AND  BOOK-STAND  •• 

Two  boxes  placed  on  sides.  Covers  removed.     Shelf, 

\\     side  strips,  and  legs  added.  \\ 

•  •  •• 
••     Illustration  54  •• 

••  BEDSIDE  STAND  •• 

Similar  to  Flower-  and  Book-Stand.     Doors  and  false 
«€     top  added.  .'! 

•  •     Illustration  55  •  • 

••  * l  SILVERETTE  "  •• 

Four  boxes  placed  top  side  up.   Covers  removed.    Three 

•  •     covers  hinged   as   lids.     Partitions,   legs,  and   false  top  •• 
..     added.  .. 

•  •  •  i 

••     Illustration  56  jj 

GAME-TABLE 

••         Two   boxes   placed   on   end.      Covers   and   bottoms   re-     •• 

•  •     moved.    Shelves,  legs,  and  false  top  added.  .. 

;j     Illustration  57  l\ 

TWIN -BED    NIGHT    TABLE 

•9  Two  boxes  placed  top  side  up.     One  has  side  removed     •  • 

•  •      and  hinged  as  door.     One  has  both  ends  removed.     Parti-     •• 

"*     tion,  legs,  and  false  top  added.  "* 

•  •  •• 

%l     Illustration  58 

NATURE-STUDY  STAND  '.*. 

H          Two  boxes  placed  top  side  up.     Four  boxes  placed  top     J* 
side  up.     Covers  of  all  removed.     Legs  and  wire  netting 

•  •     added.  !• 


BOX  FURNITURE 


137 


ODDS-AND-ENDS  STAND 


Illustration  51 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.  3  Bottled-bean  Boxes  (about  7%  in.  deep,  11%  in.  wide, 
12*4  in.  long). 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1^  in.  wide,  36  in.  long.  4  Strips 
%  in.  thick,  iy2  in.  wide,  36  in.  long. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  36  inches  long.  Remove  the  covers. 
Turn  one  box  on  its  side  and  nail  on  two  of  the  legs, 
allowing  one  end  of  each  to  project  4  inches  from  the 
bottom  face  of  the  box.  Place  the  second  box  on  its  side, 
with  its  open  top  facing  in  the  same  direction  as  the 
open  top  of  the  first  box,  and  nail  the  other  end  of  the 
legs  to  it,  keeping  their  ends  even  with  the  open-top 
edges  of  the  box.  Set  the  third  box  between  the  two 
end  boxes,  evenly  spaced,  and  nail  the  legs  to  it.  Turn 
the  three  boxes  upside  down  and  nail  the  other  legs  on 
in  the  same  manner. 


138 


BOX  FURNITURE 


ROLLING  SOILED-DISH  STAND 

Illustration  52  Figures  1  and  2 


This  stand  is  intended  to  convey  the  soiled  dishes  from 
the  dining-room  to  the  kitchen. 

Requirements : 

Body.  2  Picture  Boxes  (about  5^  in.  deep,  18  in.  wide,  30  in. 
long). 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wider  and  4  in.  longer  than  the 
outside  size  of  the  box. 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  27  in.  long.  4  Strips 
%  in.  thick,  2}4  in.  wide,  27  in.  long. 

Hardware.     4  casters  and  screws. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  27  inches  long.  Remove  the  covers. 
Turn  one  box  on  its  side  and  nail  on  two  of  the  legs. 


BOX  FUENITUEE 


139 


Keep  the  ends  of  the  legs  even  with  the  bottom  of  the 
box.  Nail  the  other  ends  of  the  legs  to  the  other  box, 
keeping  the  open  top  of  both  boxes  facing  the  same  way 
and  the  ends  of  the  legs  even  with  the  top  of  the  box. 
Turn  both  boxes  on  the  other  side  and  nail  the  other 
two  legs  in  the  same  way  to  both  boxes.  Turn  both 
boxes  so  the  legs  will  stand  in  a  vertical  position,  with 
the  top  of  the  last  box  resting  flat  on  the  floor.  Place 
and  fasten  a  caster  with  screws  under  each  corner  of  the 
bottom  compartment.  Nail  a  cleat,  iy2  inches  wide  and 
5  inches  shorter  than  the  width  of  the  top,  on  the  under 
side  of  the  top,  5  inches  from  each  end.  The  top  will 
not  be  nailed,  as  it  is  to  be  used  as  a  cover  or  loose  top. 

NOTE.  The  Smoker's  Table  shown  in  the  Den  Interior 
is  made  in  the  same  manner  as  the  Rolling  Soiled-dish 
Stand,  but  from  smaller  boxes. 


140 


BOX  FUKNITUEE 


FLOWER-  AND  BOOK-STAND 


Illustration  53 


Figures  1  and  2 


Requirements : 

Body.  2  Soap  Boxes  (about  10%  in.  deep,  14^  in.  wide,  20  in. 
long). 

Flower  Receptacle  Side.  1  Piece  ^  in.  thick,  6  in.  wide,  and 
length  equal  to  the  inside  length  of  the  box. 

Arms.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wide,  3  in.  longer  than  the 
outside  depth  of  the  box  with  the  cover  removed. 

Facing  Strips.  4  Pieces  %  in-  thick,  3  in.  wide,  3  in.  shorter 
than  the  outside  depth  of  the  box  with  the  cover  removed. 

Legs.  4  Strips  ^  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  3  in.  longer  than  twice 
the  outside  width  of  the  box.  4  Strips  *£  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  3  in. 
longer  than  twice  the  outside  width  of  the  box. 

Cleats.  4  Strips  %  in-  thick,  2  in.  wide,  and  length  equal  to  the 
inside  depth  of  the  box. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  3  inches  longer  than  twice  the  outside 
width  of  the  box.  Remove  the  covers.  Take  one  box, 


BOX  FUKNITUKE 


141 


which  will  form  the  two  lower  compartments.  Turn  it 
on  its  side ;  remove  the  top  side ;  cut  the  side  removed  to 
the  inside  length  and  width  of  the  box.  Set  it  in  half- 
way down  to  form  the  shelf,  having  previously  nailed 
a  cleat  on  each  end  to  support  it.  Take  the  other  box 
and  turn  it  upon  its  side  and  remove  the  top  side. 
Across  each  inside  end  of  the  box  nail  a  cleat.  Keep  the 
top  of  the  cleat  6  inches  below  the  top  of  the  ends  to  sup- 
port the  bottom  of  the  flower  receptacle.  Set  both  boxes 
on  the  floor,  side  by  side,  on  their  original  bottoms,  and 
hold  them  close  together  while  the  legs  are  nailed  in 
place.  Keep  their  top  ends  even  with  the  edges  of  the 
open  side  of  the  box  which  will  form  the  flower  re- 
ceptacle. Fit  the  front  side  of  the  flower  receptacle  and 
nail  it  to  the  inside  face  of  the  legs.  Turn  the  stand 
right  side  up  on  its  legs.  From  the  spare  side  removed 
from  the  box,  cut  and  fit  the  bottom  of  the  flower  re- 
ceptacle and  nail  it  to  the  cleats.  At  each  end  of  the 
stand  cover  the  joint  midway  the  height  with  a  facing 
strip  placed  centrally  over  the  joint  and  nailed  to  the 
ends  of  both  boxes.  Nail  another  facing  strip  at 


each  lower 
stand,  keep- 
torn  of  the 
with  the  un- 
the  stand.  Set 
giving  them 
over  the  legs 
the  ends  and 
the  shelf  in 
partment  to 
and  stain  or 
be  desired. 


end  of  the 
ing  the  bot- 
strip  even 
der  side  of 
the  arms, 
a  projection 
of  1  inch  at 
side.  Nail 
lower  com- 
the  cleats, 
paint  as  may 


142 


BOX  FURNITUEE 


BEDSIDE  STAND 


Illustration  54 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.  1  Soap  Box  (about  10%  in.  deep,  14*4  in.  wide,  20  in. 
long).  1  Box  (about  5  in.  deep,  14*4  in.  wide,  20  in.  long). 

Upper  Door.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  6  in.  wide,  3  in.  shorter  than 
the  length  of  the  outside  of  the  box. 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  1^  in.  wider  than  the  outside  depth 
of  the  box,  3  in.  longer  than  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Door  Cleats.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  4  in.  shorter  than 
the  outside  width  of  the  box. 

Legs.  4  Pieces  *£  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  30  in.  long.  4  Pieces 
^  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  30  in.  long. 

Hardware.  2  pull-knobs.  2  3  in.  .tee  hinges  and  screws.  21^ 
in.  butts  and  screws. 

Lower  Door.  The  lower  door  is  to  be  made  from  the  cover  re- 
moved from  the  box. 


BOX  FURNITUEE  143 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  30  inches  long.  Remove  the  cover  from 
the  larger  box.  Nail  a  leg  to  each  corner  of  this  box, 
allowing  the  ends  to  project  exactly  6  inches  on  one  side. 
Turn  in  an  upright  position  upon  its  legs. 

Remove  one  side  from  the  smaller  box  and  nail  the 
cover  down  level  and  securely.  Set  this  box  between  the 
long  projecting  ends  of  the  legs,  keeping  its  top  even 
with  the  top  ends  of  the  legs,  and  nail  the  legs  to  it. 
Have  the  open  sides  of  the  boxes  facing  the  same  way. 
Place  the  top  in  position,  keeping  the  rear  edge  even 
with  the  face  of  the  legs  and  projecting  evenly  at  the 
front  and  ends,  and  drive  the  nails  near  the  edges  and 
into  the  sides  of  the  box,  so  they  will  not  be  exposed 
either  inside  or  outside. 

Make  the  doors.  The  face  of  each  door  is  to  be  even 
with  the  face  of  the  legs.  The  length  of  the  doors  will 
be  the  distance  between  the  legs,  and  the  depth  will  be 
the  outside  depth  of  the  box.  Hang  the  upper  door  from 
its  top  by  the  l1/^  inch  butts,  one  half  of  the  butt  being 
secured  to  the  face  of  the  door  and  the  other  half  to  the 
under  side  projecting  edge  of  the  top.  Put  the  cleats  on 
the  lower  door  and  hang  with  the  tee  hinges  screwed  to 
the  face  of  both  legs  and  door.  Place  pull-knob  on  upper 
door  li/>  inches  and  on  lower  door  2%  inches  from  the 
edge  of  the  door.  Small  spring  catches  or  buttons  may 
be  placed  on  the  doors  if  desired  to  hold  them  closed. 


144 


BOX  FUENITUKE 


SILVERETTE" 


Illustration  55 


Figure  1 


This  piece  was  used  in  a  limited  space  for  one  year  in 
a  model  flat  in  a  tenement  district  and  one  year  in  a 
studio  in  the  art  quarter. 

Requirements : 

Body.  4  Bottled  Soda  Water  Boxes  (about  15  in.  wide,  20  in. 
long,  4  in.  deep). 

Cover.  3  Covers  made  from  the  box  tops.  1  Cover  3  in.  wider 
and  3  in.  longer  than  the  boxes. 

Partitions.  9  Pieces  y%  in.  thick,  width  equal  to  the  inside 
depth  of  the  boxes,  length  equal  to  the  inside  width  of  the  boxes. 


BOX  FUKNITURE  145 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  56  in.  long.  4  Strips 
^  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  56  in.  long. 

Hardware.     8  l1/^  in.  hinges  (butts)  and  screws. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  56  inches  long.  Remove  the  covers.  Fit 
and  nail  the  partitions  in  the  boxes,  spacing  them  to  suit 
the  various  articles  they  will  contain.  The  top  box  is  to 
be  used  as  one  compartment  for  table  linen. 

Fasten  the  partitions  in  place  with  l!/4  inch  brads 
driven  from  the  outside  of  the  box  into  the  ends  and 
lower  edges  of  the  partitions.  The  covers  will  be  in  two 
parts  hinged  together,  the  rear  part,  4  inches  wide,  to  be 
nailed  on  the  rear  top  part  of  the  box,  with  its  back  edge 
even  with  the  outside  face  of  the  rear  side  of  the  box. 
Hang  the  wide  portion  of  the  cover  to  this  narrow  portion 
with  the  butts  or  hinges.  The  cover  of  the  top  box  will 
be  3  inches  wider  and  longer  than  the  other  three,  as 
it  will  project  iy2  inches  over  the  outside  face  of  the  box 
all  around.  The  narrow  portion  of  this  cover  will  be  5% 
inches  wide.  Having  hung  all  the  covers  on  the  boxes, 
place  them  in  a  row  upon  the  floor,  rear  side  up,  with 
all  the  covers  facing  the  same  way,  keeping  a  space  of 
about  11  inches  between  them.  Nail  the  rear  legs  to  the 
bottom  box,  allowing  the  leg  to  project  6  inches  below 
the  bottom.  Set  the  top  box  so  that  the  upper  ends  of 
the  legs  will  come  even  with  the  under  side  of  the  cover. 
Nail  the  legs  to  this  box  also.  Move  the  two  intermediate 
boxes  until  the  spaces  between  all  the  boxes  are  the  same. 
Nail  the  legs  to  the  intermediate  boxes.  Turn  the  four 
boxes  completely,  so  that  they  will  face  front  side  up, 
and  adjust  and  nail  on  the  other  legs  in  the  same  manner. 

Stand  the  ' '  silverette "  on  its  legs. 
10 


146 


BOX  PUENITUEB 


GAME -TABLE 


Illustration  56 


Figures  1,2,  and  3 


This  table,  made  by  the  writer  as  herein  described,  has 
been  in  daily  use  at  the  Copenhagen  Settlement  in  Den- 
mark for  more  than  a  year.  The  checkers  used  were 
sawed  from  broom  handles,  one  half  of  which  were 
stained  black,  making  30  checkers  in  all. 

Requirements : 

Body.    2  Butter  Boxes  (15  in.  deep,  15  in.  wide,  20  in.  long). 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wider  than  the  depth  of  the  box 
with  the  cover  and  bottom  removed,  3  in.  longer  than  twice  the 
outside  width  of  the  box. 

Legs.  4  Strips  ^  in.  thick,  !}£  in.  wide,  9%  in.  longer  than  the 
outside  length  of  the  box.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  9l/2  in- 
longer  than  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Facing  Strips.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  9^  in.  longer 
than  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Shelves.  The  shelves  can  be  made  from  the  covers  and  bottoms 
removed. 


BOX  FUKNITUKE 


147 


End  Cleats.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  and  length  3  in. 
shorter  than  the  width  of  the  top. 

Middle  Cleats.  1  Strip  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  and  length  3  in. 
shorter  than  the  width  of  the  top. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  9%  inches  longer  than  the  outside 
length  of  the  box.  Kemove  the  cover  and  bottom  from 
each  box.  Draw  lines  across  the  inside  face  of  the  sides 
of  the  boxes  where  the  shelves  are  to  be  placed.  In  one 
box  they  will  be  located,  one  shelf  one  third  and  the 


other  shelf  two  thirds  the  height  of  the  box.  In  the  other 
box  the  shelf  will  be  one  half  the  height.  Fit  the  shelves 
and  fasten  them  with  l1/^  inch  brads  driven  from  the 
outside  through  the  sides  of  the  box  into  the  edges  of 
the  shelves.  Having  put  the  shelves  in  both,  lay  one  box 
upon  its  side  and  place  the  other  box,  upon  its  side,  upon 
the  first  box.  Match  their  edges  and  nail  them  together. 
Now  put  on  the  legs  and  facing  strips  which  also  act  as 


148 


BOX  FURNITUEE 


intermediate  legs,  using  care  that  all  the  legs  project 
4  inches  at  their  lower  ends  and  5%  inches  at  their 
upper  ends,  then  stand  the  table  upon  its  legs. 

Set  the  cover  on  the  legs,  keeping  an  even  projection 
all  around,  and  drive  three  nails  through  the  top  into  the 
upper  end  of  each  corner  leg  and  two  nails  into  the 
intermediate  legs.  The  nails  should  be  2  inches  long  to 
hold  well.  On  the  top,  directly  over  the  center  of  each 
compartment,  draw  a  12  inch  square  and  divide  each 
side  of  the  square  into  eight  equal  spaces,  then  draw 
parallel  lines  across  both  ways,  thus  dividing  the  large 
square  into  64  small  squares.  Sandpaper  the  top  face 
and  whiten  it,  then  blacken  in  every  other  square  and 
give  the  whole  top  face  a  coat  of  varnish.  The  balance 
of  the  table  can  be  stained  or  painted  any  desired  color. 

NOTE.  The  Toy  Cupboard  shown  in  the  Nursery  In- 
terior is  one  section  of  the  Game-table  made  without  the 
top  skeleton  compartment  and  with  four  legs,  and  placed 
at  each  end  of  the  Shoe  Cupboard,  which  is  made  with- 
out either  corner  trim  or  corner  legs. 


BOX  FUEN1TUKE 


149 


TWIN-BED  NIGHT  TABLE 


Illustration  57 


Figures  1  and  2 


Made  of  two  boxes.  Space  for  water-pitcher,  glasses, 
books,  and  night  conveniences. 

Requirements : 

Body.  2  Cleanser  Boxes  (about  9*4  in.  deep,  13%  in.  wide,  20 
in.  long). 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1*4  in.  wide,  26  in.  long.  4  Strips 
%  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  26  in.  long. 

Door.     Made  from  the  side  of  the  box. 

Top.  1  Piece  ^  in.  thick,  3  in.  wider  than  the  outside  width  of 
the  box,  3  in.  longer  than  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Hardware.  2  1%  in.  butts  and  screws.  1  brass  pull-knob.  1 
brass  button. 


150 


BOX  FURNITURE 


Construction : 

Make  the  legs  26  inches  long.  Remove  one  side  from 
one  box  and  one  end  from  the  second  box.  Loosen  the 
other  end  and  move  it  in  to  form  a  partition  in  the  cen- 
ter, forming  two  compartments,  each  open  end  facing 
the  opposite  way.  Turn  the  first  box  on  its  side  with  the 
open  side  up  and  nail  the  legs  on,  allowing  them  to 
project  3  inches  below  the  bottom. 

Lay  the  other  box  on  the  floor,  top  side  up,  and  nail  the 
top  on,  allowing  it  to  project  evenly  all  around.  Turn 
the  bottom  portion  of  the  stand  upon  its  legs,  with  the 
long  projecting  ends  of  the  legs  standing  up,  then  raise 


the  completed 
ment  by  the 
and  set  it  in 
four  legs  and 
to  each  corner 
.  Fit  and  hang 
screw  on  the 
brass  button  to 
closed.  Theup- 
ment  is  closed 
and  open  at 
has  a  partition 
The  lower 
has  only  the 
The  rest  is  closed. 


top  compart- 
edges  of  its  top, 
between  all 
nail  t'he  legs 
of  it. 

the  door,  and 
pull-knob  and 
hold  the  door 
per  compart- 
on  the  sides 
both  ends  and 
in  the  center, 
compartment 
door  opening. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


151 


NATURE-STUDY  STAND 


Illustration  58 


Figure  1 


The  space  between  the  upper  and  lower  compartments 
is  inclosed  with  wire  screen.  The  upper  compartment 
contains  an  ordinary  glass  aquarium. 

Requirements : 

Body.  2  Cereal  Boxes  (about  6  in.  deep,  17%  in.  wide,  23  in. 
long).  4  Salt  Boxes  (about  4  in.  deep,  4  in.  square). 


152  BOX  FURNITURE 


Door.  2  Strips  y2  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  14%  in.  long.  2  Strips 
%  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  20  in.  long. 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  42  in.  long.  4  Strips 
y2  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  42  in.  long. 

Aquarium.  1  Glass  Aquarium  about  12  in.  deep,  14  in.  wide,  20 
in.  long. 

Leg  Caps.     4  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  5  in.  square. 

Screen.     1  Piece  of  wire  fly-screen  20  in.  wide,  5  ft.  long. 

Hardware.  21  %  in.  brass  butts.  1  brass  pull-knob.  1  brass 
button. 

Construction  : 

Make  the  legs  42  inches  long.  Remove  the  covers. 
Place  the  large  boxes  on  their  sides,  having  their  open 
tops  facing  the  same  way.  Space  them  apart  about  18 
inches  and  nail  the  legs  on.  Keep  the  bottom  face  of 
one  box  4  inches  and  the  bottom  face  of  the  other  28 
inches  from  the  lower  end  of  the  legs.  Turn  the  stand 
upon  its  legs.  Cut  the  two  pieces  of  wire  screen  to  fit  the 
side  space  between  the  boxes  and  one  piece  to  fit  the  end 
spaces,  and  allow  1  inch  or  more  additional  to  both  the 
width  and  length  for  lap  to  tack  the  screen  to  the  legs  and 
boxes.  Tack  the  screens  on,  the  ends  of  which  may  be 
fastened  to  the  inside  faces  of  the  legs.  The  upper  and 
lower  edges  may  be  turned  at  a  right  angle  and  fastened 
to  the  boxes.  Fasten  each  corner  of  the  screen  first, 
drawing  it  smooth  and  without  buckles,  then  fasten 
along  the  edge  between.  Place  the  stand  on  its  legs  and 
nail  a  cap  on  the  projecting  top  of  each  leg,  setting  them 
square  with  the  legs,  and  allow  them  to  project  11/2 
inches  on  all  sides.  Make  the  door  2  inches  longer  than 
the  height  of  the  space  between  the  boxes,  and  fit  it  be- 
tween the  end  legs,  keeping  its  outside  face  even  with 
the  outside  face  of  the  legs.  Fasten  the  screen  on  the 


BOX  FUKNITURE  153 

inside  face  of  and  hang  the  door.  Screw  on  the  pull- 
knob  and  the  button.  Set  a  flower-box  on  the  center  of 
and  square  with  each  cap,  and  fasten  it  to  the  cap  with 
small  brads  driven  from  inside  the  box  into  the  cap. 
Casters  may  be  added  if  desired. 


CHAPTER  IX 

THREE  OR  MORE  BOXES  USED  IN 
SIMPLE  COMBINATION 


ZTbe  ffiebroom 


SOILED-LINEN  RECEIVER 
DOUBLE  WARDROBE  PLANT-STAND 

WASHSTAND 
MIRROR  FRAME          DRESSING-TABLE 

Color  Scheme: 

Flemish  oak  (seal  brown). 
Old  blue. 

Woodwork  : 

Brown  Flemish  oak  (stained). 

Furniture : 

Brown  Flemish. 

Walls: 

Old  blue  (light),  with  motif  stenciled  in  same  color 
as  furniture. 

Ceiling : 
White. 

Hangings : 

Canvas  in  old  blue,  with  motif  stenciled  in  same  color 
as  on  the  walls. 

Curtains : 

White  muslin. 

Floor : 

Painted  same  color  as  furniture;  rugs  old  blue  and 
brown  predominating. 

Plants  : 

Growing  plants  or  cut  flowers  with  white  blossoms. 


CHAPTER  IX 

9 
Illustration  59 

PHOTOGRAPHIC-MATERIAL   STAND 

Three  boxes  placed  on  end.  Covers  from  all  and  one 
end  from  two  removed.  One  box  sawed  in  halves.  Door, 
shelves,  legs,  and  false  top  added. 

Illustration  60 

REFERENCE   STAND 

One  box  placed  on  its  side,  cover  removed.  Shelves, 
legs,  and  false  top  added.  Two  boxes  placed  on  end, 
covers  and  one  end  removed. 

Illustration  61 

CHILD'S  CLOTHES-PRESS 

One  box  placed  on  its  side,  cover  removed.  Two  boxes 
placed  on  end,  cover  and  one  end  removed.  Shelves,  legs, 
and  false  top  added. 

Illustration  62 

UMBRELLA-   AND   OVERSHOE- STAND 

One  box  placed  on  end.  Two  boxes  placed  top  side 
op.  Covers  from  all  removed.  Shelves,  corner  trim,  and 
facing  strips  added. 

Illustration  63 

CHAFING-DISH  TABLE 

One  box  placed  top  side  up,  cover  removed.  Two 
boxes  placed  on  end.  Each  has  one  side  removed  and 
hinged  as  door.  Shelves,  legs,  and  false  top  added. 

Illustration  64 

WASHSTAND 

One  box  placed  top  side  up,  one  side  removed  and 
hinged  as  a  flap-door.  Two  boxes  placed  on  end.  Each 
has  one  side  removed  and  hinged  as  door.  Shelves,  legs, 
and  false  top  added. 

Illustration  65 

OCTAGON  NURSERY  TABLE 

Four  boxes  placed  on  end.  Each  has  one  side  re- 
moved. Shelves,  legs,  and  false  top  added. 


BOX  FUKNITUUE 


159 


PHOTOGRAPHIC-MATERIAL  STAND 

Illustration  59  Figures  1  and  2 


The  projecting  shelves  may  be  used  to  hold  the  print- 
ing-frames while  making  prints.  The  stand  may  also  be 
used  in  the  invalid-room  for  medicines  or  bandages. 
When  so  used,  growing  plants  or  small  articles  may  be 
placed  on  the  projecting  shelves. 

Requirements : 

Body.  3  Butter  Boxes  (about  10 14  in.  deep,  13%  in.  wide,  14^4 
in.  long). 

Shelves.  3  Pieces  the  same  thickness  as  the  sides  of  the  boxes, 
12  in.  longer  than  the  outside  width  of  the  boxes. 

Top.     1  Piece  3  in.  longer  than  the  end  of  the  box  each  way. 

Door.     1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  less  in  width  than  the  outside 


160  BOX  FURNITUEE 

width  of  the  box,  6  in.  longer  than  twice  the  outside  length  of  the 
box. 

Door  Cleats.  2  Strips  y2  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  4  in.  shorter 
than  the  outside  width  of  the  box. 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  iy2  in.  wide,  12  in.  longer  than 
twice  the  outside  length  of  the  box.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in. 
wide,  12  in.  longer  than  twice  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Hardware.  2  3  in.  tee  hinges  and  screws.  1  porcelain  pull-knob. 
1  button. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs.  Remove  the  covers  from  all  and  one 
end  from  two  of  the  boxes.  Midway  the  length  of  the 
box  from  which  the  cover  only  has  been  removed,  make 
a  pencil  line  across  the  bottom  and  sides.  Saw  the  box  in 
two,  cutting  on  the  line.  Turn  one  half  on  its  end,  and 
across  the  sides  place  one  of  the  shelves,  allowing  its  ends 
to  project  equally,  each  edge  being  iy2  inches  from  the 
bottom  face  and  open  side  edges  of  the  box.  Nail  the 
shelf  on  and  cut  from  the  covers  two  strips  11/2  inches 
wide,  and  length  equal  to  the  inside  width  of  the  boxes, 
and  nail  them  one  on  each  side  of  the  shelf.  Cover  the 
open  ends  of  the  other  two  boxes  in  the  same  manner. 
Turn  one  of  the  large  boxes  on  the  shelf  end  and  place 
the  other  large  box  on  its  shelf  end  upon  it,  with  the  open 
compartments  facing  the  same  way.  Match  their  edges 
and  nail  them  together.  Do  the  same  with  the  small 
box.  Nail  the  top  on,  allowing  it  to  project  equally  all 
around.  Turn  all  the  boxes  open  side  down  upon  the 
floor  and  nail  on  the  rear  legs.  Reverse  and  nail  on  the 
front  legs.  Nail  the  cleats  on  the  door,  placing  them 
about  4  inches  from  each  end.  Fit  and  hang  the  door, 
placing  the  hinges  about  6  inches  from  each  end.  Screw 
on  the  pull-knob  and  the  button. 


BOX  FUKNITUEE 


161 


REFERENCE  STAND 


Illustration  60 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.  3  Soap  Boxes  (about  10%  in.  deep,  14*4  in.  wide,  20  in. 
long). 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  6  in.  longer  than  the 
outside  length  of  the  bctxes.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  6  in. 
longer  than  the  outside  length  of  the  boxes. 

Tops.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wider  than  the  outside  depth 
of  the  box  with  the  cover  removed,  2  in.  longer  than  the  outside 
width  of  the  box. 

Facing  Strip  Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  6  in. 
longer  than  the  outside  length  of  the  long  boxes. 


Construction : 

Make  the  legs  6  inches  longer  than  the  length  of  the 
boxes.  Remove  the  covers  from  all  and  one  end  from 
each  of  two  boxes.  Use  the  removed  end  of  each  of  these 
boxes  as  a  shelf  for  each.  Stand  these  two  boxes  on  their 
closed  ends  and  place  and  nail  the  shelves  in  them  at  a 
height  to  correspond  with  the  top  side  of  the  third  box 
when  the  third  box  is  placed  on  its  side.  Stand  the  third 
box  on  end,  and  upon  its  upper  end  place  one  of  the 

11 


162  BOX  FURNITUEE 

other  two  boxes,  both  open  compartments  facing  the 
same  way.  Set  the  end  face  of  the  first  box  even  with 
the  outside  face  of  the  third  box,  match  their  edges,  and 
nail  them  together.  Turn  these  two  boxes  upside  down ; 
place  and  nail  the  second  box  to  the  other  end  of  the 
third  box  in  the  same  manner,  having  the  open  ends  of 
the  first  and  second  boxes  facing  the  same  way.  Nail  on 
the  legs,  two  at  each  end  of  the  stand,  keeping  their 
upper  ends  even  with  the  top  edge  of  the  end  sections  oi 
the  stand.  Turn  the  stand  upon  its  legs  and  nail  a  top 
on  each  end  section,  allowing  the  top  to  project  %  inch 
over  the  outside  face  of  the  legs  at  the  front,  rear,  and 
end.  Nail  on  the  facing  strip  legs,  two  on  the  front  and 
two  at  opposite  points  on  the  rear  side,  so  placed  that 
their  edges  will  project  evenly  over  the  abutting  edges  of 
the  boxes. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


163 


CHILD'S  CLOTHES-PRESS 


Illustration  61 


Figure  1 


This  is  similar  in  form  and  construction  to  the  Ref- 
erence Stand,  but  is  made  with  larger  boxes,  additional 
shelves,  and  a  curtain. 


Requirements : 

Body.  1  Packing  Box  (about  9^4  in.  deep,  28  in.  wide,  31  in. 
long).  2  Tobacco  Boxes  (about  9^4  in.  deep,  13%  in.  wide,  37  in. 
long). 

Tops.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  larger  each  way  than  the  end 
of  the  narrow  boxes. 

Shelves.  4  Pieces  ^  in.  thick,  width  equal  to  the  inside  depth 
of  the  narrow  box,  and  length  equal  to  the  inside  length  of  the 
narrow  box. 

Legs.     4  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  4  in.  longer  than  the 


164  BOX  FUKNITUKE 

narrow  boxes.  4  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  1  %  in.  wide,  4  in.  longer  than 
the  narrow  boxes. 

Facing  Strips.  4  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  4  in.  longer 
than  the  narrow  boxes. 

Hardware.  1  brass  rod  or  tube  %  in.  in  diameter,  %  in.  longer 
than  the  inside  width  of  the  wide  box. 

Curtain.  A  suitable  sliding  curtain  of  any  desired  material  or 
pattern. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  4  inches  longer  than  the  narrow  boxes. 
Remove  the  covers  from  all  and  one  end  from  each  of  the 
narrow  boxes.  Use  the  removed  end  as  shelf  for  each. 
Stand  the  narrow  boxes  on  their  closed  ends,  and  place 
and  nail  these  shelves  in  them  at  a  height  to  correspond 
with  the  top  side  of  the  wide  box,  with  the  wide  box 
placed  on  its  end.  Fit  and  nail  in  place  a  shelf  near  the 
other  end  of  each  of  the  narrow  boxes,  having  the  com- 
partments at  each  end  of  the  box  the  same  in  size.  Lay 
the  wide  box  on  its  side  and  place  one  of  the  narrow 
boxes  upon  it,  both  open  compartments  facing  the  same 
way.  Set  the  end  face  of  the  narrow  box  even  with  the 
outside  end  face  of  the  wide  box.  Match  their  edges  and 
nail  them  together.  Turn  them  upside  down  and  nail 
the  other  narrow  box  to  the  other  end  of  the  wide 
box  in  the  same  manner,  having  the  open  ends  of 
the  narrow  boxes  facing  the  same  way.  Nail  on  the 
corner  legs,  two  at  each  end  of  the  stand,  having 
their  upper  ends  even  with  the  open  ends  of  the 
boxes.  Turn  the  stand  upon  its  legs,  and  place  and  nail 
a  top  on  each  end  section,  allowing  the  top  to  project  % 
inch  over  the  outside  face  of  the  legs  at  the  front,  rear, 
and  end.  Nail  on  the  facing  strips,  two  on  the  front  and 


BOX  FUKNITURE  165 

two  at  opposite  points  on  the  rear  side,  so  placed  that 
their  edges  will  project  evenly  over  the  abutting  edges 
of  the  boxes. 

Bore  a  hole  y±  inch  in  diameter  and  y±  inch  deep  in 
the  inside  side  face  of  the  wide  compartment,  1  inch 
from  the  front  face  and  1  inch  from  the  under  side  of 
the  top  of  the  compartment.  Gouge  a  vertical  slot  *4 
inch  wide  from  one  hole  to  the  under  side  of  the  top  of 
the  compartment.  Slip  the  curtain  upon  the  rod  and 
insert  one  end  of  the  rod  in  the  first  hole  and  spring  the 
other  end  through  the  slot  into  the  second  hole. 


166 


BOX  FURNITURE 


UMBRELLA-  AND  OVEESHOE-STAND 

Illustration  62  Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.  1  Grocery  Packing  Box  (about  7%  in.  deep,  21^  in. 
wide,  31%  in.  long).  2  Shoe-polish  Boxes  (about  5%  in.  deep,  7l/2 
in.  wide,  9%  in.  long). 

Shelves.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  width  equal  to  the  inside  depth 
of  the  box,  length  equal  to  the  inside  width  of  the  box. 

Corner  Trim.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1^  in.  wide,  length  equal 
to  the  outside  length  of  the  large  box.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in. 
wide,  length  equal  to  the  outside  length  of  the  large  box. 

Vertical  Facing  Strips.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  length 
equal  to  the  outside  length  of  the  large  box. 

Top  Facing  Strips.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  1  in.  longer 
than  twice  the  outside  length  of  the  small  box  and  the  outside 
width  of  the  large  box  combined.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide, 
1  in.  longer  than  the  outside  width  of  the  large  box. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  as  long  as  the  outside  length  of  the  large 
box.  Remove  the  covers.  Fit  and  nail  the  shelves  in 
place,  making  one  compartment  about  6  inches  high,  the 
other  two  being  of  equal  height.  The  shelves  may  be 
fastened  with  li/4  inch  brads  driven  through  the  side 


BOX  FURNITUEE  167 

and  bottom  of  the  box  into  the  edges  of  the  shelves. 
Turn  the  large  box  on  its  end  on  the  floor,  the  large 
compartment  being  at  the  lower  end.  Place  one  of  the 
small  boxes  on  the  floor  against  the  side  of  the  large  box 
and  nail  them  together.  Do  the  same  with  the  other 
small  box  at  the  other  side  of  the  large  box.  Nail  the 
corner  trim  on  the  outer  end  of  each  small  box,  also  two 
vertical  facing  strips  on  both  the  front  and  the  rear  on 
the  side  edge  of  the  large  box.  Keep  the  inner  edges  of 
these  strips  even  with  the  inside  face  of  the  side  of  the 
large  box  and  their  upper  ends  even  with  the  outside 
face  of  the  top  end.  Lay  the  long  top  facing  strips,  flat 
side  down,  across  the  front  and  rear  edge  of  the  stand 
and  nail  them.  Keep  their  ends  even  with  the  outside 
face  of  the  corner  trim.  Their  outside  edges  are  also  to 
be  even  with  the  outside  face  of  the  corner  trim  and 
vertical  facing  strips.  Two  inches  back  from  each  end 
of  these  top  facing  strips  make  a  saw-cut  14  inch  deep 
and,  with  a  chisel,  cut  away  the  top  half  of  the  strip  at 
this  point.  Do  the  same  with  each  end  of  all  the  short 
facing  strips.  Make  two  similar  saw-cuts  2  inches  apart 
across  the  top  of  the  long  strips,  in  line  with  both  edges 
of  the  four  vertical  facing  strips  and  cut  away  in  like 
manner.  Place  all  the  short  strips  in  place,  the  uncut 
side  up,  and  fit  their  ends  into  the  recesses  cut  in  the 
long  strips  and  nail  them.  These  recesses  are  made  and 
fit  like  those  described  for  the  Picture  Frame,  Illustra- 
tion 72. 


168 


BOX  FUENITUEE 


CHAFING-DISH  TABLE 


Illustration 


Figures  1  and  2 


There  are  two  closets  on  the  side  and  a  drawer  be- 
tween. The  recess  between  the  side  closets  is  closed  at 
the  rear  by  a  junction  piece  extending  2  inches  below 
the  drawer.  Each  closet  contains  two  shelves. 


Requirements : 

Body.  2  Canned-tomato  Boxes  (about  10%  in.  deep,  13%  in. 
wide,  18%  in.  long).  1  Canned-asparagus  Box  (about  8^4  in.  deep, 
12  in.  wide,  14%  in.  long). 

Doors.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  width  1%  in.  less  than  the  closet 
box,  and  length  equal  to  the  outside  length  of  the  closet  box. 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wider  than  the  outside  width  of 
the  closet  boxes,  3  in.  longer  than  the  outside  length  of  the  drawer 
box  and  twice  the  outside  depth  of  the  closet  boxes  combined. 

Shelves.  4  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  width  equal  to  the  outside  depth 
of  the  closet  box,  length  equal  to  the  inside  width  of  the  closot  box. 

Drawer  Guides.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  length  equal 
to  side  width  of  the  closet  boxes. 

Facing  Strips.  1  Strip  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  length  equal  to 
the  outside  length  of  the  drawer  box. 

Back  Strips.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wider  than  the  outside 
depth  of  the  drawer  box,  3  in.  shorter  than  the  outside  length  of 


BOX  FURNITURE  169 

the  drawer  box  and  twice  the  outside  depth  of  the  closet  boxes  com- 
bined. 

Legs.  4  Strips  ^  in.  thick,  1*£  in.  wide,  28  in.  long.  4  Strips 
y%  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  28  in.  long. 

Hardware.  4  3  in.  tee  hinges  and  screws.  4  pull-knobs.  2  small 
brass  hooks  and  screws.  2  brass  screw-eyes. 


Construction : 

Make  the  legs  28  inches  long.  Remove  one  side  from 
the  boxes  which  are  to  form  the  side  closets  and  nail  the 
cover  down  closely,  then  fit  and  fasten  in  the  shelves  with 
brads  driven  from  the  outside  of  the  box  through  into 
the  edges  of  the  shelves,  two  shelves  to  each  box.  Place 
the  drawer  box  upon  the  floor,  top  side  up,  and  remove 
the  cover.  Against  each  end  of  this  box  place  one  of  the 
closets  on  end,  with  the  open  fronts  facing  the  same  way. 
Place  the  top  across  the  tops  of  the  closets,  allowing  its 
rear  edge  to  project  */£  inch  over  the  back  face  of  the 
closets  and  l1/^  inches  over  each  end  and  the  front  of 
the  closets,  and  nail  it  to  them.  Turn  all  three  boxes 
face  down  on  the  floor,  and  move  the  drawer  up  against 
the  under  side  of  the  top,  and  nail  the  rear  legs  on  the 
outside  corners  of  the  closets.  Temporarily  to  hold  the 
rear  legs  the  proper  distance  apart,  place  a  light  strip  of 
wood  across  the  backs  of  them  near  their  lower  ends  and 
fasten  slightly  to  one  leg,  then  draw  the  legs  together 
until  they  measure  the  same  distance  apart  at  the  bottom 
as  at  the  top,  and  nail  the  strip  to  the  other  leg.  Nail 
on  the  back  strip,  placing  its  upper  edge  against  the 
under  side  of  the  top.  This  back  strip  will  extend 
across  the  rear  upper  ends  of  both  closets  between  the 
rear  legs,  its  outside  face  being  even  with  the  outside 
rear  face  of  the  legs.  Remove  the  temporary  strips  and 


170 


BOX  FURNITURE 


turn  the  table  upon  its  back,  front  side  up.  Fit  the 
drawer  into  place  and  fasten  the  drawer  guides  to  the 
side  of  each  closet  for  the  drawer  to  slide  upon,  and  place 
a  block  at  the  back  to  prevent  its  going  in  too  far.  Their 
ends  should  be  even  with  the  front  face  of  the  closets  be- 
fore the  door  is  hung.  Put  the  front  legs  on  and  hang 
the  doors.  Put  the  temporary  strip  across  the  lower  ends 
of  the  front  legs  the  same  as  for  the  back  legs,  then,  with 
both  doors  closed,  fit  the  facing  strip  across  the  ends  of 
the  drawer  guides  and  between  the  closets  under  the 
drawer.  The  outer  face  of  the  facing  strip  will  be  even 
with  the  outer  faces  of  the  drawer  and  the  doors.  Screw 
on  the  knobs  and  place  a  small  hook  and  eye  just  below 
the  facing  strip  to  keep  the  doors  closed.  Remove  the 
temporary  strips  and  stand  the  table  upon  its  legs. 


BOX  FUENITUEE 


171 


WASHSTAND 


Illustration  64 


Figures  1  and  2 


Requirements : 

Body.  1  Butter  Box  (about  10^  in.  deep,  13  in.  wide,  25  in. 
long).  2  Condensed-milk  Boxes  (about  7*4  in.  deep,  13  in.  wide, 
19%  in.  long). 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  7  in.  longer  and  2  in.  wider  than  the 
bottom  of  the  box. 

Doors.     Made  from  the  covers  of  the  boxes. 

Small  Shelves.  4  Pieces  ^  in.  thick,  width  equal  to  the  inside 
width  of  the  box,  and  length  equal  to  the  inside  depth  of  the  box. 

Large  Shelf.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  about  13  in.  wide,  10^>  in. 
long. 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1*4  in.  wide,  31  in.  long.  4  Strips 
%  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  31  in.  long. 

Towel  Eods.     2  Child 's  broom  handles. 

Curtain  Eod.     1  Child 's  broom  handle. 

Waterproof  Cover.  1  Piece  white  enameled  oil-cloth,  3  in.  wider 
and  longer  than  the  top. 

Curtain.     1  Piece  cloth,  %  yd.  long. 


172  BOX  FUKNITUEE 

Hardware.  1  package  carpet  tacks  to  fasten  oil-cloth.  6  brass 
hinges.  4  brass  curtain  hooks  for  towel-rod  hangers.  2  brass  cur- 
tain hooks  for  curtain-rod  hangers.  2  small  brass  hooks  and  screw- 
eyes  for  fastening  the  side  doors. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs.  Place  the  largest  box  with  its  side 
upon  the  floor.  Put  the  small  boxes  upright  upon  it,  one 
at  each  end,  with  the  faces  even  at  the  end,  and  nail 
them  to  the  lower  box,  driving  the  nails  down  through 
the  ends  of  the  small  boxes.  Clinch  them  on  the  under 
side  of  the  top  of  the  bottom  box.  Keep  all  the  open 
compartments  of  the  boxes  to  the  front,  and  all  the  faces 
even  with  each  other. 

Make  the  top  of  the  washstand  of  two  or  more  boards 
7  inches  longer  and  2  inches  wider  than  the  bottom  box. 
Cut  a  circular  hole  in  the  center  of  the  top,  suitable  for 
the  bowl  which  rests  in  it,  allowing  the  edge  of  the  bowl 
to  project  about  an  inch  above  the  top.  Sandpaper  and 
smooth  the  edges  of  the  hole.  Then  nail  the  top  across 
the  tops  of  the  upper  boxes,  so  that  the  front  edge  will 
project  IVi  inches,  the  ends  3%  inches  each,  and  the  rear 
edge  i/2  incn  beyond  the  boxes.  Make  the  shelves  and  fit 
them  in  place,  securing  them  with  nails  driven  through 
the  sides  of  the  boxes.  The  shelf  for  the  waste-water  pail 
should  be  placed  so  that  the  top  of  the  r>ail  will  be  3 
inches  from  the  top  of  the  washstand. 

Nail  the  legs  on  the  outside  corners  of  the  upright 
boxes,  driving  the  nails  into  the  edges  of  the  upper  boxes. 
Make  the  doors  and  hang  them.  Put  the  pull-knobs  2 
inches  from  the  edges,  in  the  middle  of  the  doors.  When 
finished,  the  outer  faces  of  the  doors  and  the  legs  will  be 
even  with  each  other. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


173 


Put  on  the  brass  hooks  and  screw  in  the  eyes  for 
fastening  the  upper  doors. 

The  curtain  pole  is  made  of  a  child's  broom  handle 
cut  to  the  proper  length  and  held  up  by  two  brass  hooks 
screwed  into  the  under  side  of  the  top.  The  towel  racks 
at  each  end  of  the  washstand  are  made  of  broom  handles 
held  by  brass  hooks  placed  3l/2  inches  below  the  top  of 
the  stand. 

Cover  the  top  with  the  white  enameled  oil-cloth, 
stretched  taut,  turned  under  the  edges,  and  tacked  un- 
derneath. For  the  bowl  opening,  cut  a  hole  much  smaller 
than  the  opening  and  slit  the  edges,  turning  them  back 
and  tacking  them  on  the  under  side. 


174 


BOX  FURNITUKE 


OCTAGON  NURSERY  TABLE 


Illustration  65 


Figures  1  and  2 


Four  children  may  sit  at  the  table  while  at  play,  each 
having  a  shelved  compartment  to  hold  his  toys.  The 
table  may  be  set  at  meal-time  for  the  little  ones. 

Requirements : 

Body.  4  Soap  Boxes  (about  10%  in.  deep,  14^4  in.  wide,  20  in. 
long). 

Shelves.  12  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  width  equal  to  the  inside  width 
of  the  box,  and  length  equal  to  the  inside  depth  of  the  box. 

Legs.  12  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  2  in.  longer  than  the 
outside  length  of  the  box.  12  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  2  in. 
longer  than  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  octagon  shape  42  in.  across  from  side 
to  side  (six  boards  wide.  See  Fig.  2). 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  2  inches  longer  than  the  outside  length 
of  the  box.  Remove  the  covers.  Fit  and  nail  three 
shelves  in  each  box,  placing  the  first  one  6  inches  from 
one  end  of  the  box,  the  next  one  11  inches  from  the  same 


BOX  FURNITURE 


175 


end,  and  divide  the  balance  of  the  space  equally  with  the 
third  shelf.  Fasten  the  shelves  with  1%  inch  wire  brads 
driven  from  the  outside  through  into  the  ends  of  the 
shelves.  Nail  two  legs  on  each  box  at  the  corners  of  the 
open  side,  allowing  them  to  project  2  inches  over  the  end 
having  the  largest  compartment.  Stand  each  box  on  its 
legs  so  placed  as  to  form  a  hollow  square  in  the  center, 
having  the  open  sides  face  out.  (See  outline  of  the 
boxes  in  dotted  lines  in  Fig.  2  of  the  illustration.)  Place 
a  small  block  2  inches  high  under  the  rear  end  of  each 


box  to  make  it  stand  level.  Move  the  boxes  together 
until  the  corners  touch  and  match.  Place  the  inner  legs 
in  a  reverse  position  to  fit  in  each  angle,  and  nail  to  both 
boxes  forming  the  angle,  using  the  try-square.  Make 
the  top  of  octagon  shape,  42  inches  across  from  side  to 
side.  Use  seasoned,  grooved  and  tongued  material  % 
inch  thick,  7  inches  wide,  planed  on  both  sides.  Draw 
the  octagon  full  size  on  the  floor.  Divide  the  space 
across  in  six  equal  spaces  and  draw  the  lines  represent- 
ing the  boards  as  shown  in  Fig.  2.  Lay  the  boards  be- 


176  BOX  FURNITURE 

tween  the  lines  and  mark  and  cut  them  to  the  proper 
angle.  Place  them  across  the  tops  of  the  boxes  and  nail 
firmly,  driving  each  tightly  against  the  other,  allowing 
each  side  edge  to  project  about  1  inch  over  the  outside 
face  of  the  legs.  Set  the  nail-heads  slightly  below  the 
top  surface,  and  then  finish  the  top  face  with  the  smooth- 
ing-plane. 

If  preferable,  the  boards  forming  the  top  may  be 
joined  with  hot  glue  instead  of  the  groove-and-tongue 
joint,  but  the  edges  must  be  held  tightly  together  about 
thirty-six  hours,  or  until  the  glue  becomes  hard,  before 
nailing  the  top  in  place. 


CHAPTER  X 

THE  BOX  TAKEN  PARTLY  OB  ENTIRELY  APART  AND 
THE  MATERIAL  USED  IN  CONSTRUCTION 


12 


L  Cbe  Stubio 


stenciled  in  black. 


!...!     Floor: 

Painted  black,  with  rugs  in  Oriental  colors. 

G     Plants  : 
Vines  and  growing  plants  with  orange-colored  or 
i  deep  red  blossoms. 


!      ! 

| — •          "NOTIONETTE"  LARGE  WALL  RACK 

W  WINDOW-SEAT 

"SILVERETTE"  "  DRESSERETTE  " 

CHAFING-DISH  TABLE 

GREEK-CROSS  TEA-TABLE     DESK  CHAIR 
CLUB-ROOM  STOOL 

Color  Scheme: 
Black. 
Orange. 

WoodworTc : 

Black  paint. 

J    J     Furniture: 

Black  paint. 

j— j     Walls: 

Orange,  with  motif  stenciled  in  orange  brighter  than 
j"""i  the  walls,  with  a  touch  of  black. 

!...!     Drop  Ceiling: 

Same  color  as  walls,  but  much  lighter  shade. 

•  M... 

i     Hangings,  Table-  and  Couch-covers: 
!_._•  Dark  green,  with  motif  stenciled  in  black  and  orange.    ..... 

*     Curtains:  —  j 

Net  in  light  orange  or  green,  with  small  motif 


..... — ..... — p.-. — .—. — ..... — ...... 

...j i.,.i — LJ — L.J — L.J — L.J. 

-j  CHAPTER  X 

..!  * 

Illustration  66 

,m\  KETTLE-  AND  COVER-HOLDER 

One  box  placed  on  side.    Cover  and  one  end  removed. 
Illustration  67 

j— - ]  NEST  OF  BENCHES 

L.-1          Seven  boxes  placed  top  side  up.     Both  sides  and  the 
!     cover  removed  from  each,  and  one  thicker  side  and  cor- 
ner cleats  added. 
I— j 
!-..!     Illustration  68 

TABLE   BOOKSTAND 

j One  box  placed  top  side  up.    Cover  and  one  side  re- 

moved.   Legs  and  handle  arms  added. 

Illustration  69 

FIREWOOD  OR  NEWSPAPER  RACK 

One  box  placed  top  side  up.     Cover  and  both  sides 
removed.    Side  braces,  legs,  and  handle  arms  added. 


j      j 

j 

• 


Illustration  70 

DRESSING-TABLE   CHAIR 

One  box  placed  top  side  up.  Cover,  one  side,  and 
partitions  of  both  ends  removed.  Legs  and  finish  trims 
added. 


• •    Illustration  71 

FLAG  WALL  RACK 

Bj          Four  boxes  placed  on  their  sides.     Covers  and  both 
!     sides  of  each  box  removed.    Three  sides  used  as  shelves. 
.!    Bottom  partitions  and  facing  strips  added. 

'    Illustration  72 

PICTURE  FRAME  NO.  1 

One  side  removed  from  a  packing  box  of  %  inch  wood. 


Illustration  73 

MIRROR  FRAME 

The  same  as  Illustration  72. 
— •     Illustration  74 

PICTURE  FRAME  NO.  2 
"     • 

Both  sides  removed  from  a  40-inch  packing  box. 


Illustration  75 

"DRESSERETTE" 

One  box  taken  apart  and  the  materials  used  in  con- 
struction. 

j~— j     Illustration  76 

GREEK-CROSS    TEA-TABLE 

L-i 


Two  boxes  placed  top  side  up  with  covers  removed. 
Portions  of  three  other  boxes  used.   . 


Illustration  77 

CHILD'S  BEDSTEAD 

•j         One  box  placed  top  side  up,  cover  removed.     Legs  and 
i     framework  added. 

•    Illustration  78 

,!  INVALID'S  BED-TABLE 

One  box  placed  top  side  up.     One  end  removed  and 
„.„!    hinged  as  door.     Shelves,  revolving  portion,  legs,  and  top 
I    added. 


i  . 

;  -.-} — ...... — .... — „„. — .........  ...... 

L-L....L-L...±..!....J...! LJ -L 


J 


182 


BOX  FUENITUKE 


KETTLE-  AND  COVER-HOLDER 

Illustration  66 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.  1  Window-glass  Box  (about  2~y2  in-  deep,  21  in.  wide, 
31  in.  long). 

End  Strips.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1  in.  wide,  and  length  equal 
to  the  outside  width  of  the  box. 

Bottom  Strip.  1  Strip  %  in.  thick,  1  in.  wide,  and  length  1  in. 
shorter  than  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Brace.  1  Strip  %  in.  thick,  l1/^  in.  wide,  and  length  equal  to 
the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Hardware.  6  brass  hooks.  The  end  strips,  bottom  strip,  and 
brace  may  be  made  from  the  side. 

Construction : 

Remove  the  cover  and  one  side.  Nail  one  end  strip 
placed  on  its  edge  across  each  end  (and  both  on  the  same 
side)  of  the  cover.  Keep  the  outside  face  and  the  ends 
of  the  strip  even  with  the  edges  of  the  cover.  Nail  the 
bottom  strip,  also  placed  on  its  edge,  extending  from  one 


BOX  FURNITURE  183 

end  strip  to  the  other  and  along  the  lower  edge  of  the 
holder.  Place  the  brace  across  the  end  strip.  Screw  the 
hooks  into  the  body  of  the  holder  just  below  the  brace  at 
points  best  suited  for  the  various  sizes  of  frying  and 
sauce  pans.  The  covers  placed  behind  the  brace  are  sup- 
ported by  their  knob  handles  resting  upon  the  top  edge 
of  the  brace. 


184 


BOX  FUKNITUEE 


NEST  OF  BENCHES  FOR  KINDERGARTEN 
AND  SETTLEMENT 

Illustration  67  Figure  1 

This  simple  device  is  an  excellent  substitute  for  extra 
chairs.  The  set  has  a  seating  capacity  for  nine  persons, 
seating  them  according  to  age  or  size,  two  children  being 
seated  upon  each  of  the  two  larger  benches.  Two  sets 
were  used  constantly  in  the  Sunshine  Cottages. 

The  outside  dimensions  of  the  finished  seats  are  as  fol- 
lows: 

1  seat    8      in.  deep,    9  in.  wide,  16  in.  long 


1  " 

8  1/2 

i  ( 

10   " 

18 

1  " 

9 

1  1 

11   " 

20 

1  " 

9% 

(  i 

12   " 

22 

1  " 

10 

1  1 

I  0      (  I 

24 

1  " 

10  Ms 

(  i 

14   " 

26 

1  " 

11 

i  ( 

15   " 

28 

The  benches  are  made  from  boxes  by  removing  the 
covers  and  sides,  one  side  being  replaced  with  a  thicker 
piece  forming  the  seat. 

Requirements : 

Bodies.  7  Boxes  varying  in  size,  but  each  sufficiently  large  to 
make  one  of  the  benches.  The  ends  of  the  boxes  must  be  %  in. 
thick  and  the  bottoms  not  more  than  %  in.  thick. 


BOX  FURNITUEE  185 

Seats.        1  piece  %  in.  thick,    8  in:  wide,  16  in.  long. 

1  "  %  "            8y2  "  18  " 

1  "  %  lt            9  "  20  " 

1  "  %  "  9%  "  22  " 

1  "  %  "  10  "  24  " 

1  "  %  "  10%  "  26  " 

1  "  %  "  11  "  28  " 

Construction : 

Remove  the  covers  and  both  sides  from  the  boxes,  and 
reduce  the  remaining  portion  of  each  box  to  form  a 
bench.  The  following  table  specifies  the  outside  dimen- 
sions of  each  body-piece  before  the  addition  of  the  seat. 

1  body-piece    8      in.  deep,    8*4  in-  wide,  16  in.  long 

1  "             8%  "  9%  "  18  " 

1  "            9  "  10^4  "  20  " 

1  "             9%  "  •  11^4  "  22  " 

1  "  10  "  12^4  "  24  " 

1  "  10%  "  1314  '*  26  ll 

1  "  11  "  141/4  "  28  " 

Nail  a  seat  to  each  body-piece  of  a  corresponding  size, 
using  care  to  have  the  ends  of  the  body-piece  square 
with  the  bottom,  which  then  becomes  the  back  of  the 
bench.  Use  2  inch  wire  nails  to  secure  the  seat  to  the 
ends.  When  completed,  the  benches  should  all  fit  one 
within  the  other  as  shown.  Paint  or  stain  them  any 
color,  dark  green  being  suggested  as  serviceable. 


186 


BOX  FURNITURE 


TABLE  BOOKSTAND 


Illustration  68 


Figures  1  and 


Requirements : 

Body.     1  Bluing  Box,  6%  in.  deep,  11%  in.  wide,  13  in.  long. 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  4  in.  longer  than  the 
height  of  the  box.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1^  in.  wide,  4  in.  longer 
than  the  height  of  the  box. 

Handle  Arms.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  iy2  in.  wide,  3  in.  longer 
than  the  width  of  the  box. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs. 4  inches  longer  than  the  height  of  the 
box.  Remove  the  cover  and  one  side  of  the  box.  Place  a 
leg  at  each  corner  and  nail  firmly,  allowing  each  leg  to 
project  2  inches  both  above  and  below  the  box.  Set  the 
heads  of  tne  nails  well  in  and  clinch  the  points  on  the 
inside.  Use  a  light  hammer  and  the  brad-awl  if  neces- 
sary, as  the  material,  being  thin,  is  liable  to  split.  Place 
the  handle  arms  flat  side  down  on  top  of  and  across  the 
legs,  having  the  outer  edge  even  with  the  outside  face 
of  the  legs,  each  end  projecting  equally  over  the  front 
and  rear  face  of  the  legs.  Use  long,  slender  wire  brads 
for  securing  the  handle  arms  to  the  legs,  driven  from  the 


BOX  FURNITURE  187 

top  through  the  arms  into  the  tops  of  the  legs.  Do  not 
fail  to  place  a  well-driven  nail  through  the  front  legs 
into  the  edge  of  the  bottom,  as  indicated  by  the  dots  in 
the  illustration. 


188 


BOX  FURNITURE 


FIREWOOD  OR  NEWSPAPER  RACK 

Illustration  69  Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.  1  Condensed-milk  Box  (about  7*4  in.  deep,  13  in.  wide, 
19%  in.  long). 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in-  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  8  in.  longer  than  the 
height  of  the  box.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  8  in.  longer 
than  the  height  of  the  box. 

Handle  Arms.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  5  in.  longer  than 
the  width  of  the  box. 

Side  Braces.  2  Strips  Vj  in.  thick,  2%  in.  wide,  and  the  length 
equal  to  the  length  of  the  box  inside. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  8  inches  longer  than  the  height  of  the 
box  with  the  cover  removed.  Remove  the  cover  and  both 
sides  of  the  box.  Turn  the  remaining  portion  on  its  side 
and  nail  the  legs  of  one  side  in  position.  Turn  the  box- 
over  and  secure  the  legs  of  the  other  side,  allowing  each 
leg  to  project  4  inches  above  and  4  inches  below  the  box. 
Place  the  try-square  on  the  bottom  and  against  the  end 
to  square  it,  then  drive  a  nail  through  the  legs  intc  the 


BOX  FUKNITUEE  189 

edge  of  the  bottom  at  the  points  shown  by  the  dots,  to 
hold  it  square.  Having  made  both  ends  square  and 
secure,  place  the  rack  upright  on  its  legs,  and  cut  the  side 
braces  to  the  neat  inside  length  between  the  ends.  Place 
them  on  edge  inside  and  secure  with  nails  driven  through 
the  legs  from  the  outside,  and  clinch  the  nails  on  the  in- 
side face  of  the  brace.  Place  the  handle  arms  on  top  of 
the  legs,  having  their  outer  edges  even  with  the  outside 
face  of  the  legs,  and  project  the  ends  equally  outside  of 
the  legs  both  front  and  rear.  Use  long,  slender  wire 
nails  for  securing  the  handle  arms  to  the  legs,  driven 
from  the  top  through  the  arms  into  the  legs. 


190 


BOX  FUENITUEE 


DRESSING-TABLE  CHAIR 


Illustration  70 


Figure  1 


The  children's  chairs  shown  in  the  Nursery  Interior 
and  the  baby's  high  chair  in  the  Dining-room  Interior 
are  a  smaller  type  of  this  chair  made  with  smaller  boxes, 
the  former  having  shorter  and  the  latter  longer  legs. 

Requirements : 

Body.  1  Canned-soup  Box  (about  11  in.  deep,  13%  in.  wide, 
18%  in.  long). 

Legs.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  21  in.  long.  2  Strips 
1/2  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  21  in.  long.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in. 
wide,  25  in.  long.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  25  in.  long. 

Back  Top.     1  Strip  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  19^  in.  long. 

Arms.     2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  14  in.  long. 

Seat  Support.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wide,  13%  in.  long. 
1  Strip  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wide,  17^4  in.  long. 


BOX  FUENITUKE  191 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs,  two  21  inches  and  two  25  inches  long. 
Remove  the  cover  and  one  side  from  the  box.  Cut  each 
end  down  to  a  height  of  6  inches.  Nail  on  the  legs,  al- 
lowing them  all  to  project  15  inches  below  the  bottom 
(which  is  to  form  the  seat)  of  the  box.  Place  a  seat 
support  under  each  end,  having  its  edge  against  the 
bottom,  and  nail  both  ends  to  the  legs.  Place  the  other 
support  across  between  the  front  legs  and  nail  it  firmly. 
Stand  the  chair  upon  its  legs.  Trim  the  top  edges  of  the 
back  and  the  back  legs  until  they  are  even,  and  nail  on 
the  back  top.  Saw  off  that  portion  of  each  front  leg 
above  the  seat  which  projects  inside  the  end  face  of  the 
body  of  the  chair,  and  fit  and  nail  the  arms  on,  having 
their  inside  edges  even  with  the  inside  face  of  the  body. 
It  will  be  necessary  to  cut  the  rear  end  of  the  arm  to  let 
the  rear  leg'  in  even  with  the  inside  edge  of  the  arm. 
The  front  end  of  the  arm  may  project  %  inch  over  the 
face  of  the  leg. 


192 


BOX  FURNITURE 


FLAG  WALL  RACK 


Illustration  71 


Figure  1 


The  collection  of  national  flags,  as  seen  in  the  Dining- 
room  Interior,  is  a  pleasing  Scandinavian  custom.  An 
additional  charm  is  added  to  the  dining-table  when,  as 
guest,  your  country's  colors  blend  in  decoration  with 
those  of  your  host.  The  rack  may  also  be  used  for  pot- 
tery or  plants,  or  the  open  pockets  for  books,  as  in  the 
Den  Interior. 


Requirements : 

Body.  3  Condensed-milk  Boxes  (about  T1^  in.  deep,  13  in.  wide, 
19%  in.  long). 

Bottom.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  width  equal  to  the  outside  depth 
of  the  box,  10^4  in.  longer  than  three  times  the  outside  length  of 
the  box. 

Facing  Strips.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  3~y2  in.  wide,  the  length 
equal  to  the  inside  width  of  the  box. 

Junction  Strips.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  7  in.  wide,  the  length 
equal  to  the  inside  width  of  the  box. 

End  Shelves.  2  Pieces  ^2  in.  thick,  the  width  equal  to  the 
inside  depth  of  the  box,  and  12%  in.  long. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


193 


Middle  Shelf.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  the  width  equal  to  the  in- 
side depth  of  the  box,  and  18%  in.  long. 

Pocket  Partitions.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  the  width  equal  to  the 
inside  depth  of  the  box,  and  length  equal  to  the  inside  width  of  the 
box.  The  ends  from  a  fourth  condensed-milk  box  will  serve  for 
pocket  partitions. 

Construction : 

Remove  the  cover  and  both  sides  from  each  box.  Stand 
the  remaining  portion  of  all  the  boxes  in  a  line  end  to 
end  on  their  sides,  with  the  end  and  bottom  edges  up, 
having  the  bottoms  all  facing  the  same  way,  and  lay  the 
rack  bottom  piece  across  the  ends  upon  them,  and  nail 
it  to  the  end  edge  of  the  end  boxes,  having  the  end  of 
the  rack  bottom  even  with  the  outside  end  face  of  the 
boxes,  and  allow  it  to  project  y2  inch  over  the  outside  bot- 
tom face  of  the  boxes.  Set  the  third  box  midway  between 


the  other  two,  with  the  same  projection  of  rack  bottom 
over  the  bottom  face  of  the  box,  and  nail  the  rack  bottom 
to  the  bottom  edge  of  the  box.  With  the  try-square  set 
each  end  of  each  box  square,  and  at  the  same  time  nail 
through  the  rack  bottom  into  their  ends.  Turn  the  piece 
over  so  that  the  bottoms  of  all  three  boxes  face  up.  Nail 
on  the  junction  pieces  which  join  the  bottoms  together, 

13 


194  BOX  FUENITUEE 

and  at  each  end  nail  the  facing  strips  on  the  back,  hav- 
ing the  edge  of  the  facing  strips  even  with  the  ends  of 
the  rack.  Turn  the  rack  right  side  up  and  fit  and  nail 
in  place  the  pocket  partitions  and  shelves,  keeping  the 
tops  of  the  shelves  3  inches  below  the  top  edge  of  the 
rack,  and  the  pockets  all  of  an  even  width  of  about  5Vs 
inches. 

The  rack  may  be  hung  with  picture  wire  and  hooks  or 
nailed  to  the  wall,  as  circumstances  permit. 


BOX  FUKNITUBE 


195 


PICTURE  FRAME  No.  1 


Illustration  72 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wide,  23*4  in.  long.  2  Strips 
%  in.  thick,  3  in.  wide,  33  in.  long. 

Glass.     1  Glass  16  in.  by  26  in. 

Back.  1  Stiff  Pasteboard,  16  in.  by  26  in.  1  Piece  heavy  brown 
paper,  18  in.  by  28  in. 

Construction : 

The  frame  is  quite  easy  to  make,  but  care  should  be 
taken  to  make  the  joints  a  good  close  fit.  Plane  the  strips 
true  and  smooth,  and  cut  the  ends  perfectly  square.  The 
longer  strips  should  measure  exactly  33  inches  long ;  the 
shorter  ones  23*4  inches  long.  Halve  both  ends  of 
the  longer  ones  3  inches  back,  thus : 


and  halve  one  end  of  each  of  the  shorter  ones  in  the  same 


196  BOX  FURNITURE 

manner,  and  groove  out  the  other  end  of  each  of  the 
shorter  ones,  thus: 


keeping  the  outer  edge  of  the  groove  114  inches  from  the 
end.  The  groove  will  be  3  inches  wide  to  receive  the  end 
of  the  longer  strip.  Wrap  a  piece  of  sandpaper  around 
a  block,  and  smooth  all  the  cuts  until  they  fit  perfectly 
when  the  strips  are  matched  together.  A  rabbet  14  inch 
wide  and  %  incn  deep  must  be  cut  in  each  strip  along 
the  edge,  forming  the  opening  to  receive  the  glass,  pic- 
ture, and  pasteboard  backing,  thus : 


making  the  short  strips  right-  and  left-handed. 

Fit  all  the  pieces  together  and  mark  and  cut  the  rabbet 
in  the  long  strips,  which  will  be  along  the  edge  on  the 
uncut  side  of  the  strip.  Lay  both  long  strips  flat  on  their 
backs,  parallel  with  each  other  and  about  16  inches  apart. 
Coat  each  joint  with  hot  glue  and  fit  the  side  strips  in 
place,  and  hold  each  corner  tightly  together  with  a  screw 
clamp.  If  no  clamps  are  convenient,  put  a  weight  (a  flat- 
iron,  for  instance)  upon  each  corner  after  first  using  the 
try-square  to  square  it.  Or  the  frame  may  be  fastened 
at  the  joints  with  four  short  screws  set  in  from  the  back, 
the  length  of  which  must  be  slightly  less  than  the  thick- 
ness of  the  frame.  Insert  glass,  picture,  and  pasteboard 
back,  and  secure  with  small  tacks.  Stretch  brown  paper 
over  the  entire  back,  and  glue  or  paste  its  edges  to  the 
frame. 


BOX  FUENITUKE 


197 


MIRROR  FRAME 


Illustration  73 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wide,  38  *£  in.  long.  3  Strips 
%  in.  thick,  3  in.  wide,  19^4  in.  long. 

Mirrors.  1  Mirror  Glass,  14  in.  square.  2  Mirror  Glasses,  7  in. 
wide,  14  in.  long. 

Backs.  1  Sheet  of  stiff  pasteboard,  14  in.  square.  2  Sheets  of 
stiff  pasteboard,  7  in.  wide,  14  in.  long. 

Construction : 

Halve  the  ends  of  all  the  strips.  Each  long  strip  must 
have  two  grooves  %  inch  deep  and  3  inches  wide  to  re- 
ceive the  intermediate  strips.  The  outer  edge  of  these 
grooves  will  be  9~y2  inches  from  each  end  of  the  long 
strips.  Cut  a  rabbet  all  around  the  inside  edge  of  the 
frame  and  on  both  edges  of  the  intermediate  strips. 
For  instructions,  see  description  of  Picture  Frame  No.  1, 
Illustration  72. 


198 


BOX  FUENITUKE 


PICTURE  FRAME  No.  2 


Illustration  74 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wide,  64%  in.  long.  6  Strips 
%  in.  thick,  3  in.  wide,  19%  in.  long. 

Glass.     2  Clear  Window-glasses,  14  in.  square. 

Back.  2  Sheets  of  stiff  pasteboard,  14  in.  square.  3  Sheets  of 
stiff  pasteboard  7  in.  wide,  14  in.  long.  2  Pieces  heavy  brown 
paper,  15  in.  square.  3  Pieces  heavy  brown  paper,  8  in.  wide,  15  in. 
long. 

Construction : 

Halve  the  ends  of  all  the  strips.  Each  long  strip  must 
have  four  grooves  %  inch  deep  and  3  inches  wide  to 
receive  the  intermediate  strips.  The  outer  edge  of  the 
first  groove  will  be  9%  inches  from  the  end  of  the  strip, 
and  the  second  one  will  be  26  inches.  Cut  a  rabbet  all 
around  the  inside  edge  of  the  frame  and  on  both  edges 
of  the  intermediate  strips.  For  instructions,  see  descrip- 
tion of  Picture  Frame  No.  1,  Illustration  72. 


BOX  TUENITUEE 


199 


'DRESSERETTE" 


Illustration  75 


Figure  1 


This  little  ' '  Dresserette "  was  used  in  a  studio  for  a 
year  in  place  of  a  dressing-table,  and,  as  it  was  secured 
to  the  wall  in  the  corner  of  the  room,  no  floor  space  was 
required  for  it. 

Requirements : 

Body.     1  Shoe  Box  (about  14  in.  deep,  21  in.  wide,  34  in.  long). 

Sides.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  one  12%  in.  and  one  13*4  in.  wide, 
each  28  in.  long. 

Shelves.  3  Pieces  ^  in.  thick,  triangular  shape  with  1  in.  added 
to  the  depth. 


200 


BOX  FURNITURE 


Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  triangular  shape  with  1  in.  added  to 
the  depth. 

Bottom.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  triangular  shape  with  1  in.  added 
to  the  depth. 

Corner  Trim.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  1^  in.  wide,  28  in.  long. 
2  Pieces  y2  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  28  in.  long. 

Door.     1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  15  in.  wide,  28  in.  long. 

Door  Cleats.     2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  14  in.  long. 

Hardware.  2  1%  in.  brass  hinges  (butts)  and  screws.  1  brass 
pull-knob.  1  brass  button. 

Construction : 

Cut  the  parts  called  for  in  the  requirements  (except 
the  hardware)  from  the  shoe  box. 

Make  the  corner  trim  in  the  usual  way  (the  same  as 
corner  legs  are  made)  28  inches  long.  Place  the  top  and 
bottom  with  the  longest  or  base  edge  on  the  bench,  the 
triangle  pointing  up.  Nail  the  widest  side  piece  to  them, 
having  its  ends  even  with  the  outside  face  of  both  the 
top  and  bottom,  its  upper  edge  projecting  y2  inch  over 
the  points.  Fit  and  nail  the  other  side  piece  on  the 
opposite  edge  of  the  triangles.  Turn  the  piece  over,  lay- 
ing it  on  one  of  the  sides,  and  fit  the  shelves  in,  spacing 


BOX  FUENITUEE  201 

them  equally  between  the  ends,  using  the  try-square  to 
make  them  true. 

Plane  the  edge  of  the  short  legs  of  the  corner  trim 
until  they  fit  on  each  corner,  as  shown  in  Fig.  2,  and 
nail  them  in  place.  Nail  the  cleats  across  the  door,  put- 
ting one  3  inches  from  each  end.  Fit  and  hang  the  door 
and  screw  the  pull-knob  and  button  on.  Fig.  2  shows  the 
base  of  the  triangle  to  be  18  inches,  the  height  9  inches, 
and  the  length  of  each  side  12^4  inches.  Before  cutting, 
1  inch  is  added  to  the  front  of  the  shelf  to  receive  the 
corner  trim. 


202 


BOX  FURNITURE 


GREEK-CROSS  TEA-TABLE 


Illustration  76 


Figures  1  and  2 


This  unique  tea-table  is  most  convenient  for  a  small 
space.  It  may  be  used  as  a  serving-table.  The  two 
drawers  are  used  for  holding  spoons  or  flat  silver  or  as 
trays  for  serving.  The  lower  compartment  is  open  on 
opposite  sides,  the  other  two  sides  being  closed.  The 
drawers  extend  through,  with  pull-knobs  on  both  ends. 
The  leaves  are  hinged  and  fold.  When  in  use,  the  leaves 
are  held  up  by  swiveled  arms  secured  to  the  under  side 
of  the  table  top. 

Requirements : 

Body.  1  Packing-box  (about  19  in.  square,  26  in.  long).  2 
Raisin  Boxes. 

Top.     1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  18  in.  square. 

Drawer  Shelves.     2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  17  %  in.  square. 


BOX  FURNITURE  203 

Leaves.     4  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  7  in.  wide,  18  in.  long. 

Shelf  Separators.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  17^4  in. 
long. 

Arms.     4  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  1^4  in-  wide,  9  in.  long. 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  25  in.  long.  4  Strips 
%  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  25  in.  long. 

Hardware.  8  1^>  in.  brass  butts  and  screws.  4  small  brass 
knobs.  4  screws  ^  in.  in  diameter  and  1%  in.  long. 

Construction : 

Select  a  packing-box  whose  ends  are  %  inch  thick,  and 
use  one  end  for  the  table  top,  and  cut  the  drawer  shelf 
and  leg  strips  from  the  sides  and  cover.  Make  the  legs 
25  inches  long.  Make  the  top  18  inches  square,  each 
edge  being  perfectly  straight  and  smooth.  Make  the 
two  shelves  1714  inches  square.  Lay  them  upon  the 
bench,  with  the  grain  of  the  wood  of  both  shelves  run- 
ning in  the  same  direction.  Place  the  separators  on  edge 
at  opposite  sides  between  them  and  at  right  angles  to  and 
across  the  grain  of  the  wood  of  the  shelves.  Nail  both 
shelves  to  them  with  1%  inch  brads  driven  through  the 
shelf  into  the  edge  of  the  separator,  having  the  outside 
face  and  ends  of  the  separator  even  with  the  edges  of 
the  shelves.  Turn  them  upon  edge  and  nail  a  leg  at  each 
corner,  allowing  all  the  legs  to  project  10  inches  on  the 
same  side.  Stand  on  its  legs  and  put  on  the  top,  nail- 
ing it  to  the  top  of  each  leg,  having  the  edges  of  the  top 
even  with  the  outside  face  of  the  legs  all  around.  Place 
the  brass  butts  about  3  inches  each  way  from  each  corner, 
cutting  away  the  edges  sufficiently  to  let  the  butts  in 
even  with  the  edges  of  the  top.  Fit  the  leaves,  letting 
the  butts  into  their  edges  in  the  same  way,  and  hang 
them.  Bore  a  ^4  incn  n°le  through  the  center  of  each 


204 


BOX  FUENITUEE 


arm  4  inches  from  one  end,  and  counter-bore  one  side  of 
each  so  that  the  head  of  the  screw  will  go  in  even.  Turn 
the  table  upside  down  and  screw  the  arms  on  the  under 
side  of  the  top,  placing  the  screw  1  inch  from  each  edge, 
and  midway  in  the  opposite  direction.  Make  the  trays 
from  the  raisin  boxes  and  fit  them  between  the  legs,  cut- 
ting them  down  and  moving  in  their  sides  and  ends  if 
necessary.  Screw  two  knobs  on  each  end  of  each  tray, 
placing  them  1%  inches  from  each  side  edge,  or  about  4 
inches  apart. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


205 


CHILD'S  BEDSTEAD 


Illustration  77 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Body.  1  Packing-box  (about  15*4  in.  deep,  26%  in.  wide,  51 
in.  long). 

Legs.  4  Strips  y2  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  36  in.  long.  4  Strips 
1/2  in-  thick,  2  in.  wide,  36  in.  long. 

Top  Frame  Side.  2  Strip's  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  51  in.  long. 
2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  54  in.  long. 

Top  Frame  End.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  25%  in. 
long.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  29%  in.  long. 

Side  Slats.     38  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  22  in.  long. 

Facing  Strips.  2  Strips  %  in-  thick,  2  in.  wide,  48  in.  long. 
2  Strips  y2  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  23%  in.  long. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  34  inches  long.  Take  the  box  apart  and 
reduce  the  depth  to  7  inches  outside  depth  without  the 
cover.  Put  the  box  together  again  and  turn  it  on  its 
side.  Nail  on  the  legs,  allowing  them  to  project  12 
inches  below  the  bottom  face  of  the  box,  and  17  inches 


206  BOX  FURNITURE 

above  the  open  top  edge.  Place  it  upon  its  legs  and  nail 
on  the  facing  strips  along  the  bottom  of  the  sides  and 
ends,  having  the  bottom  edge  of  the  strips  even  with  the 
bottom  face  of  the  box.  Nail  the  51-inch-long  strip  to 
the  inside  face  of  the  legs,  extending  it  from  leg  to  leg 
at  opposite  ends,  having  its  upper  edge  even  with  the 
top  of  the  legs.  Put  the  other  one  on  the  opposite  side, 
and  put  the  25^-inch-long  strips  across  the  ends.  Miter 
the  ends  of  the  other  top  frame  strips  to  an  angle  of  45 
degrees  and  place  them  on  their  flat  sides  on  the  other 
top  frame  strips,  having  their  inner  edges  even  with  the 
inner  face  of  the  lower  top  frame  strip,  and  nail  them 
together.  Place  the  slats  on  the  outside  face  of  the  box, 
with  their  lower  ends  resting  on  the  facing  strips,  having 
their  upper  ends  on  the  outside  face  of  the  top  frame  to 
which  they  are  to  be  nailed.  Place  and  nail  all  the  slats, 
spacing  them  equally  2  inches  apart. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


207 


INVALID'S  BED-TABLE 


Illustration  78 


Figure  1 


The  table  has  a  lower  compartment,  having  one  door 
for  night  conveniences,  upon  which  rests  a  tea-tray  for 
serving  tea  or  a  light  luncheon.  The  upper  section  con- 
tains a  revolving  rack  fitted  with  shelves  carrying  the 
articles  most  frequently  required  by  the  invalid,  who 
turns  the  rack  at  will. 


Requirements : 

Body.     1  Household-ammonia  Box   (about  10%  in.  deep, 
in.  wide,  18%  in.  long). 

Door.     Made  from  the  side  removed  from  the  box. 

Tray.     Made  from  parts  of  a  box  14%  in.  square. 

Shelf.     1  Piece  y2  in.  thick,  18%  in.  square. 

Top.     1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  21%  in.  square. 

Circular  Heads.     2   Heads   about   13   in.   in   diameter  removed 
from  a  half  barrel. 


208  BOX  FUENITUKE 

Vertical  Divisions.  1  Piece  y2  in.  thick,  13  in.  wide,  12  in.  long. 
2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  6^4  in.  wide,  12  in.  long. 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  33  in.  long.  4  Strips 
y2  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  33  in.  long. 

Hardware.  21%  in.  hinges  (butts)  with  screws.  1  porcelain 
pull-knob.  1  brass  button  and  screw. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  33  inches  long.  From  the  material 
forming  the  above-mentioned  box,  make  a  box  10%  inches 
deep,  181/2  inches  square,  outside  measurements,  with 
one  side  left  open.  Turn  the  box  on  its  side  and  nail  the 
legs  on,  allowing  each  one  to  project  3^2  inches  below 
the  bottom,  and  stand  the  table  upon  its  legs.  Make  the 
shelf  18%  inches  square.  To  prevent  its  splitting,  put  a 
cleat  %  inch  thick,  iy2  inches  wide,  across  each  end. 
Make  the  revolving  shelf  rack  by  standing  the  wide 
division-piece  on  end,  and  upon  it  place  one  of  the  heads, 
with  the  end  of  the  partition  extending  exactly  across 
the  center  of  the  head,  and  nail  them  together.  On  each 
side  of  the  wide  division  and  at  a  right  angle,  place  also 
on  end  one  of  the  narrow  divisions  and  nail  through  the 
head  into  its  end.  Turn  the  piece  upside  down  and 
place  and  nail  the  other  head  in  a  similar  manner  to  the 
other  ends  of  the  division-pieces.  Fit  a  shelf  (having  its 
outer  edge  curved  the  same  as  the  heads)  in  three  of  the 
compartments  and  place  and  secure  them  at  varying 
heights  to  suit  any  of  the  small  articles  chat  an  invalid 
would  require.  Cut  off  the  heads  of  two  3  inch  wire 
nails,  and  with  the  awl  make  a  hole  a  little  smaller  than 
the  nail  through  the  center  of  each  head,  and  drive  the 
headless  nail  into  the  hole  in  each  head,  allowing  each 
nail  to  project  %  inch,  which  completes  the  rack.  Enter 


BOX  FURNITURE  209 

the  shelf  between  the  legs  at  their  upper  ends,  and  lower 
and  nail  it,  the  distance  between  its  upper  face  and  the 
top  of  the  legs  being  y±  inch  greater  than  the  outside 
length  of  the  revolving  rack.  Bore  a  hole  (slightly  larger 
than  the  headless  nail)  through  the  exact  center  of  the 
shelf.  Put  a  small  leather  or  metal  washer  (metal  is 
better)  14  incn  thick  directly  over  the  hole  in  the  shelf, 
and  set  the  rack  in  place  with  the  headless  nail  project- 
ing through  the  washer  into  the  hole  in  the  shelf.  Make 
the  top  211/2  inches  square;  put  a  cleat  %  inch  thick, 
11/2  inches  wide,  on  the  under  side  across  each  end. 
Keep  each  end  and  the  outside  edge  of  the  cleat  1% 
inches  from  the  outside  edge  of  the  top,  and  it  will  come 
between  and  inside  of  the  projecting  legs  when  the  top  is 
nailed  on.  Bore  a  hole  in  the  center  of  the  top  to  receive 
the  headless  nail  projecting  from  the  top  of  the  rack,  and 
nail  on  the  top,  allowing  it  to  project  on  all  sides  1  inch 
over  the  outer  face  of  the  legs.  Fit  and  hang  the  door. 
Screw  on  the  knob  and  button.  Make  a  tray  14i/*>  inches 
square  of  material  %  inch  thick.  It  should  be  about  2 
inches  deep  on  the  outside. 


14 


CHAPTER  XI 

MORE  ELABORATE  COMBINATIONS  OF  THE  ARTICLES 

IN   THE   PREVIOUS   CHAPTERS   AND  WITH 

LARGER    AND   A    GREATER 

NUMBER  OF  BOXES 


Hnxmlfo'e  IRoom 


INVALID'S  BED  TABLE  WALL  DESK  AND  CHAIR 

CORNER  WASHSTAND       SMALL  WALL  RACK 

•  •  WINDOW- SEAT 

Color  Scheme: 
White. 
Old  rose. 

Woodwork : 

White  paint. 

•  •      Furniture: 

White  paint,  with  motif  stenciled  in  old  rose.  •  • 

Walls: 

Old  rose,  with  motif  stenciled  in  white. 

Ceiling : 
White. 

Hangings  and  Window-seat  Cover: 
Linen  in  old-rose  color. 

Curtains  and  Bedspread: 

White  dotted  swiss.    The  motif  may  be  expressed  by 
,    g  embroidering  the  dots  in  groups  with  old-rose  silk. 

Floor: 

Light  wood,  left  in  its  natural  state  and  varnished, 
with  rugs  of  old  rose  and  white. 

Plants: 

Growing  ivy,  white  and  rose-colored  geraniums,  and 
deep  pink  roses. 


CHAPTER  XI 

* 
Illustration  79 

TEACHER'S  DESK 

Two  large  boxes  placed  on  end.  Covers  removed  and 
hinged  as  doors.  Two  small  boxes  placed  on  end,  covers 
removed.  Corner  trim,  shelves,  brace,  and  false  top 
added. 

Illustration  80 

BOY'S   WORK-TABLE 

Two  boxes  placed  on  end.  Covers  removed  and  hinged 
as  doors.  One  box  placed  top  side  up,  cover  removed. 
Shelves,  corner  trim,  and  false  top  added. 

Illustration  81 

WINDOW-SEAT 

Four  boxes  placed  on  their  sides.  Covers  of  all  and 

one  side  of  two  removed.     One  box  placed  on  end,  the 

other  end  removed.  Shelves,  legs,  facing  strips,  and 
seat  added. 

Illustration  82 

BEDROOM  WINDOW-SEAT 

Two  boxes  placed  on  end.  Covers  removed  and  hinged 
as  doors.  One  end  of  each  removed.  Two  boxes  placed 
top  side  up,  covers  removed.  Lids,  shelves,  and  legs 
added. 

Illustration  83 

COLLEGE  CORNER  SEAT 

,   B  Four  boxes  placed  on  their  sides.     Covers  of  all  and 

one  side  of  two  removed.  Two  boxes  placed  on  end,  other 
end  removed.  One  box  placed  top  side  up.  Shelves,  legs, 
trims,  and  seat  added. 

Illustration  84 

SINGLE  WARDROBE 

Two  boxes  placed  top  side  up.  One  has  side  removed 
and  hinged  as  flap-door,  one  has  end  removed.  One  box 
placed  on  end,  cover  removed.  Shelf,  door,  legs,  and  false 
top  added. 

.1..       ,.: :..  ..:..      ..:.. 


•  • 


Illustration  85 

DOUBLE  WARDROBE 

Four  boxes  placed  top  side  up.     Two  have  one  side      •  • 
removed  and  hinged  as  flap-door,  two  have  ends  removed. 
Two  boxes  placed  on  end,  covers  removed.     Shelf,  doors, 
legs,  and  false  top  added. 

Illustration  86  ,  , 

SPITZBERGEN  SIDEBOARD 

Two  boxes  placed  on  end  and  one  box  on  its  side. 
Covers  of  all  removed  and  hinged  as  doors.  One  box 
placed  top  side  up,  cover  removed.  Partitions,  shelves, 
legs,  false  top,  and  plate  rack  added. 

Illustration  87 

ALLENDALE   SIDEBOARD 

Four  boxes  placed  on  their  sides.    Covers  and  one  side 
of  two  removed.    Covers  of  two  hinged  as  doors.    Shelves,     ,  B 
legs,  false  top,  and  plate  rack  added. 

Illustration  88 

COPENHAGEN  SIDEBOARD 

Four  boxes  placed  on  end.  Covers  of  two  removed. 
Sides  of  two  removed  and  hinged  as  doors.  Two  small 
boxes  placed  on  end,  covers  removed  and  hinged  as  doors. 
One  box  placed  on  its  side,  cover  removed.  Shelves,  legs, 
and  false  top  added. 


•I.. 


216 


BOX  FUENITUEE 


TEACHER'S  DESK 


Illustration  79 


Figure  1 


Requirements : 

Closets.     2  Kubber-shoe  Cases    (about   13%   in.  deep, 
wide,  27%  in.  long). 

Pigeonholes.  2  Cocoa  Boxes  (5  in.  deep,  8%  in.  wide,  11  in. 
long). 

Closet  Shelves.  4  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  width  equal  to  the  inside 
width  of  the  box,  and  length  equal  to  the  inside  depth  of  the  box. 

Partitions.  2  Pieces  %  in,  thick,  6  in.  wide,  and  length  equal 
to  the  inside  depth  of  the  box. 

Corner  Trim.  8  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  and  length 
equal  to  the  outside  length  of  the  box.  8  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  2  in. 
wide,  and  length  equal  to  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wider  than  the  outside  depth 
of  the  box,  and  42  in.  long. 

Brace.     1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  6  in.  wide,  and  36  in.  long. 

Pigeonhole  Shelves.  4  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  the  width  equal  to 
the  inside  depth  of  the  box,  and  length  equal  to  the  inside 
length  of  the  box.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  4  in.  wide,  and  length 
equal  to  the  inside  depth  of  the  box. 

Long  Shelf.     1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  the  width  equal  to  the  out- 


BOX  FUENITUKE  217 

side  depth  of  the  box  with  the  cover  removed,  and  about  22  in. 
long. 

Door  Cleats.  4  Pieces  ^  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  5  in.  shorter  than 
the  outside  width  of  the  box. 

Doors.  The  doors  will  be  made  from  covers  removed  from  the 
boxes. 

Hardware.     2  pull-knobs.     4  3  in.  tee  hinges  and  screws. 


Construction : 

Make  the  corner  trim  (same  construction  as  described 
for  legs)  the  same  length  as  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 
Remove  the  covers.  Turn  one  of  the  larger  boxes  open 
side  up,  and  fit  the  lower  shelf  in  place  (snug  fit),  plac- 
ing it  in  the  center  of  the  length  of  the  box,  and  secure  it 
by  driving  1*4  inch  brads  through  the  sides  of  the  box 
directly  into  the  edges  of  the  shelf.  Space  the  brads 
about  3  inches  apart.  Fit  the  upper  shelf.  Remove  it 
and  fasten  to  it  the  partition,  with  the  brads  driven 
through  the  shelf  into  the  edge  of  the  partition,  placing 
the  partition  at  the  center  of  the  shelf.  Place  the  shelf 
and  partition,  and  secure  the  shelf  in  the  same  manner 
as  the  lower  shelf,  having  the  partition  close  up  to  the 
end  of  the  box.  Set  the  partition  vertically  true  and 
secure  it  with  brads  driven  through  the  end  of  the  box 
into  its  edge.  Nail  on  the  corner  trim,  placing  one  on  the 
corner  of  each  closet  box.  Make  the  door  to  fit  between 
the  corner  trim.  Make  it  14  incn  shorter  than  the  out- 
side length  of  the  box.  Put  the  cleats  on;  the  upper 
one  just  low  enough  to  clear  the  upper  shelf,  and  the 
lower  one  the  same  distance  up  from  the  bottom  end. 
Lay  the  door  on,  having  the  top  end  even  with  the  end 
of  the  box.  Place  the  hinges  about  15  inches  apart  and 
equal  distance  from  the  ends.  Screw  the  knob  on  the 


218  BOX  FURNITUKE 

door  midway  the  height  and  2  inches  from  the  edge.  A 
small  screw-button  may  be  placed  on  the  leg  opposite  the 
knob  to  hold  the  door  closed.  Duplicate  this  with  the 
other  large  box.  Stand  both  closets  on  end,  space  apart, 
and  put  the  top  on,  having  the  rear  edge  even  with  the 
face  of  the  corner  trim.  Have  the  ends  and  front  project 
equally,  then  nail  securely  to  each  closet.  Cut  away  the 
back  half  of  the  lower  end  of  the  rear  inside  corner  trim 
for  a  height  of  6  inches  from  the  bottom  end  of  the 
closets,  to  receive  the  brace.  Put  the  brace  on  and  nail 
it  in  place.  It  will  extend  across  the  rear  of  the  closets 
at  the  bottom,  fitting  into  the  recess  made  in  the  two  in- 
side corner  trims,  and  its  ends  will  butt  against  the  out- 
side corner  strips,  its  rear  face  being  even  with  the  rear 
face  of  the  corner  trim.  Place  the  small  boxes  which  are 
to  form  the  pigeonholes,  and  fasten  them  by  nails  driven 
from  the  inside  of  the  box  into  the  top  of  the  desk,  hav- 
ing their  ends  and  rear  faces  even  with  the  edges  of  the 
desk  top.  Fit  and  secure  the  shelves  and  partitions  with 
small  brads  in  the  same  manner  as  those  for  the  closets. 
Put  a  small  cleat  %  inch  thick  and  %  inch  deep  on  the 
inner  ends  of  each  box,  and  cut  the  shelf  to  length  and 
fasten  with  brads  driven  through  near  its  ends  into  the 
cleats. 


BOX  FUKNITURE 


219 


BOY'S  WORK-TABLE 


Illustration  80 


Figure  1 


Similar  to  the  Teacher 's  Desk,  without  the  upper  com- 
partments and  having  the  closets  open  at  the  sides  in- 
stead of  in  front;  the  waste  box  between,  acting  as  a 
brace,  makes  a  rear  brace  as  in  the  Teacher's  Desk  un- 
necessary. 

NOTE.  The  Kitchen  Table  is  made  the  same  as  the 
Boy's  Work-Table,  except  that  the  closets  are  provided 
with  additional  shelves  and  have  no  doors,  and  two 
shelves  in  the  recess  supplant  the  waste  box  between  the 
closets. 


Requirements  : 

Closets.  2  Rubber-shoe  Boxes  (about  13%  in.  deep,  14^  in. 
wide,  27 y2  in.  long). 

Waste  Receptacle.  1  Jam  Box  (about  11%  in.  deep,  7%  in. 
wide,  18  in.  long). 

Bench  Top.  1  Piece  1  in.  thick,  6  in.  wider  than  the  outside 
width  of  the  closet  boxes,  6  in.  longer  than  twice  the  outside  depth 
of  the  closet  boxes  added  to  the  outside  length  of  the  waste-recep- 
tacle box  (2  boards  wide). 


220  BOX  FURNITUEE 

Shelves.  4  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  the  width  equal  to  the  inside 
depth  of  the  box,  and  length  equal  to  the  inside  width  of  the  box. 

Doors.     Made  from  the  covers  removed  from  the  boxes. 

Door  Cleats.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  l1/^  in.  wide,  2%  in.  shorter 
than  the  outside  width  of  the  closet  box. 

Corner  Trim.  8  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  and  length 
equal  to  the  outside  length  of  the  closet  box.  8  Strips  %  in.  thick, 
1%  in.  wide,  and  length  equal  to  the  outside  length  of  the  closet 
box. 

Hardware.  4  1%  in-  hinges  (butts).  2  porcelain  pull-knobs. 
2  buttons. 

Construction : 

Make  the  corner  trim  the  length  of  the  outside  length 
of  the  closet  box.  Remove  the  covers.  Nail  the  corner 
trim  on  both  closet  boxes  and  stand  them  on  end  on  the 
floor  22!/2  inches  apart,  with  their  closed  backs  facing 
each  other.  Place  the  waste-wood  receptacle  on  the  floor 
between  them,  its  open  top  facing  up,  and  nail  each  end  of 
it  to  one  of  the  closets.  The  waste  box  should  be  in  a  cen- 
tral line  with  the  closets.  Clinch  the  nails  and  fit  and 
nail  the  shelvjes  in  place,  one  shelf  in  the  closet  contain- 
ing the  long  tools  and  three  in  the  other  closet,  spaced 
apart  as  will  be  most  convenient.  Put  the  top  on  and 
nail  it  in  place,  allowing  it  to  project  3  inches  over  the 
face  of  the  doors  and  the  same  over  the  sides  of  the 
closets.  '  Make  and  fit  the  doors,  putting  the  cleats  on 
the  inside  face  at  such  heights  as  not  to  interfere  with 
the  shelves  when  the  doors  are  closed.  Hang  the  doors 
and  screw  on  the  pull-knobs  and  buttons. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


221 


WINDOW-SEAT 


Illustration  81 


Figures  I  and 


This  practical  Window-Seat  is  made  by  combining  two 
Flower-  and  Plant-Stands  having  slots  cut  across  in  the 
back  of  each  to  receive  the  ends  of  a  portable  seat  which 
is  supported  at  its  center  by  a  box  made  similar  to 
the  Coal-  or  Paper-Box,  without  its  cover,  Illustration 
16.  As  the  individual  pieces  forming  the  window-seat 
merely  support  or  rest  upon  each  other,  they  may  easily 
be  assembled  or  removed  as  desired.  The  box  support 
compartment  makes  a  convenient  receptacle  for  cover- 
ings and  pillows  when  not  in  use  and  can  be  readily 
withdrawn,  as  the  seat  merely  rests  upon  it. 

Requirements : 

Bodies.  4  Soap  Boxes  (about  10%  in.  deep,  14*4  in.  wide, 
20  in.  long).  1  Box  of  the  same  width  and  depth,  but  4  in. 
shorter,  so  that  it  will  not  project  outside  the  edge  of  the  seat. 

Top  Compartment  Sides.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  6  in.  wide,  by 
the  length  of  the  box  inside. 


222 


BOX  FURNITURE 


Arms.  4  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wide,  by  3  in.  longer  than 
the  outside  depth  of  the  box  with  the  cover  removed. 

Facing  Strips.  8  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wide,  by  3  in. 
shorter  than  the  outside  depth  of  the  box  with  the  cover  removed. 

Legs  for  Seat  Support.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  4  in. 
longer  than  the  outside  width  of  the  box.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1% 
in.  wide,  4  in.  longer  than  the  outside  width  of  the  box. 

Legs  for  Stand.  8  Strips  l/2  in'  thick,  1^  in.  wide,  3  in.  longer 
than  twice  the  outside  width  of  the  box.  8  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in. 
wide,  3  in.  longer  than  twice  the  outside  width  of  the  box. 

Seat.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  narrower  than  the  outside 
length  of  the  box,  about  10  in.  longer  than  the  window-sill. 

Cleats.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  4  in.  wide,  the  length  equal  to  the 
width  of  the  seat. 


Construction : 

For  making  the  end  supports,  see  description  for  con- 
structing Flower-  and  Book-Stand,  Illustration  53.  In 
addition  to  this  it  will  be  necessary  to  cut  a  slot  1  inch 
high  in  the  back  of  each  stand,  extending  from  leg  to  leg, 
and  each  end  of  the  seat  will  pass  through  the  slot  and 
project  about  3  inches  inside,  and  will  rest  upon  the 


bottom  of  the  upper  compartment.  The  seat  can  be 
made  of  two  boards  held  together  by  cleats  nailed  across 
them  on  their  under  side.  Keep  the  nearest  edge  of  cleat 


BOX  FUKNITUBE  223 

inches  from  the  end  of  the  seat.  Drive  the  nails  from 
the  top  of  the  seat  through  the  cleats  and  clinch  them 
well  on  the  under  side. 

Remove  the  cover  from  the  smaller  box  and  make  the 
legs.  Nail  a  leg  on  each  corner,  keeping  their  top  ends 
even  with  the  top  of  the  box.  Turn  the  box  upon  its  legs 
and  place  it  under  the  seat  to  act  as  a  center  support. 


224 


BOX  FUENITUEB 


BEDROOM  WINDOW-SEAT 


Illustration  82 


Figures  1  and  2 


A  combination  of  a  window-seat,  washstand,  and 
underwear  closet,  the  length  of  the  seat  compartment 
being  made  to  suit  the  width  of  the  window.  The  wash- 
stand  is  shown  on  the  right  and  the  underwear  closet  on 
the  left,  having  a  top  compartment  fitted  to  keep  neck- 
wear or  handkerchiefs  The  seat  boxes  may  contain 
shoes,  extra  bedding,  or  other  articles,  while  toilet  arti- 
cles may  be  kept  in  the  various  compartments. 

Requirements : 

Closets.  2  Packing-boxes  (about  14  in.  deep,  21  in.  wide,  34  in. 
long). 

Seat  Support.  2  Packing-boxes  (about  12  in.  deep,  14  in.  wide, 
22  in.  long). 

Closet  Tops.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wider  than  the  outside 
depth  of  the  closet  boxes,  3  in.  longer  than  the  outside  width  of 
the  closet  boxes. 

Seat.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  1  in.  wrider  than  the  outside  width, 
and  twice  the  length  of  the  seat  box. 


BOX  FUKNITUEE  225 

Seat  Cleats.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wide,  the  length  equal 
to  the  inside  width  of  the  box. 

Shelves.  4  Pieces  V2  in.  thick,  the  width  equal  to  the  inside 
depth  of  the  closet  box,  and  length  equal  to  the  inside  width  of 
the  box. 

Partitions.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  %  in.  shorter  than 
the  inside  depth  of  the  box. 

Top  Compartment  Front  Face.  1  Strip  y2  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide, 
and  length  equal  to  the  inside  width  of  the  box. 

Doors.     Made  from  the  covers  of  the  closet  boxes. 

Door  Cleats.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1^  in.  wide,  4  in.  shorter 
than  the  outside  width  of  the  closet  boxes. 

Corner  Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  iy%  in.  wide,  4  in.  longer 
than  the  outside  length  of  the  closet  boxes.  4  Strips  ^  in.  thick, 
2  in.  wide,  4  in.  longer  than  the  outside  length  of  the  closet  boxes. 

Facing  Strip  Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  4  in. 
longer  than  the  outside  length  of  the  closet  boxes.  2  Strips  ^  in. 
thick,  2  in.  wide,  2  in.  longer  than  the  outside  depth  of  the  seat 
box  with  the  cover  removed. 

Seat  Facing  Strip.  2  Strips  ^  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  1  in. 
shorter  than  twice  the  outside  length  of  the  seat  box. 

Hardware.  81%  in.  brass  hinges  (butts)  and  screws.  3  2  in. 
brass  hinges  (butts)  and  screws.  2  brass  pull-knobs.  2  brass  but- 
tons and  screws. 


Construction : 

Make  the  corner  legs  4  inches  longer  than  the  outside 
length  of  the  larger  or  closet  boxes.  Remove  the  covers 
from  all  and  one  end  from  each  of  the  closet  boxes.  The 
ends  removed  may  be  used  for  the  lower  shelf  in  each 
closet.  Fit  and  nail  the  shelves  in  place  in  both  closets, 
setting  those  in  the  washstand  at  the  proper  height  to 
suit  the  pail,  pitcher,  and  bowl,  as  in  the  Office  Wash- 
stand.  (See  Illustration  39.)  Set  those  in  the  other 
closet  to  suit  the  underclothing  which  they  will  contain. 
Or,  if  spaced  as  shown  in  the  illustration,  the  height  of  the 

15 


226 


BOX  FUENITUEE 


compartments,  naming  them  from  the  bottom  up,  would 
be  about  12  inches,  10  inches,  7  inches,  and  2  inches.  Stand 
one  of  the  seat  boxes  on  end  and  place  the  other  one  upon 
it  endwise,  with  both  open  compartments  facing  the  same 
way,  and  nail  them  together.  Upon  the  end  of  the  top 
one  place  one  of  the  closets  on  its  side,  having  the  open 
end  facing  the  same  way  and  the  closed  end  even  with 
the  bottom  of  the  seat  box.  Match  their  edges  and  nail 


them  together.  Reverse  them  and  join  the  other  closet 
box  in  the  same  manner.  Nail  the  four  corner  and  four 
facing  strip  legs  on  the  closets,  front  and  rear,  allowing 
the  outside  edge  of  the  facing  strip  legs  to  project  y2  inch 
over  the  outside  face  of  the  closets,  having  their  upper 
ends  even  with  the  top  of  the  closets.  Place  and  nail  the 
facing  strips  along  each  top  side  of  the  seat  boxes,  hav- 
ing the  upper  edge  of  the  strips  even  with  the  top  edges 
of  the  boxes.  Put  the  seat  facing  strip  legs  on,  front  and 
rear,  and  turn  the  piece  upon  its  legs.  Place  and  nail 
the  front  face  of  the  top  compartment  of  the  underwear 


BOX  FUENITURB  227 

closet  and  set  in  and  nail  the  partitions.  The  hinged 
tops  will  be  made  in  two  pieces,  the  narrow  piece  of  each 
being  4  inches  wide.  Nail  one  narrow  piece  on  each 
closet,  allowing  it  to  project  over  the  face  of  the  legs  1 
inch  at  the  sides  and  rear.  Hang  the  wide  piece  to  this 
narrow  one.  Put  the  cleats  on  the  doors,  one  4  inches 
from  each  end.  Fit  and  hang  the  doors  and  screw  on  the 
pull-knobs  and  the  buttons. 

Make  and  fit  the  seat,  putting  the  cleats  6  inches  from 
each  end,  allowing  even  space  at  each  end  of  the  cleat. 
The  seat  will  not  be  hinged,  and  when  closed  the  cleats 
should  fit  inside  the  boxes  and  hold  the  seat  from  side 
movement. 


BOX  FURNITUKE 


COLLEGE  CORNER  SEAT 


Illustration  83 


Figures  1  and  2 


Requirements : 

The  same  as  for  the  Window-seat  (Illustration  81),  with  the 
addition  of  two  boxes  supported  on  legs,  as  follows: 

Ell  Seat.  1  Soap  Box  (about  8%  in.  deep,  15%  in.  wide,  20% 
in.  long). 

End  Support.  1  Candle  Box  (about  10%  in.  deep,  12%  in. 
wide,  16  in.  long). 

Legs.  8  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  18%  in.  long.  8 
Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  18^4  in.  long. 

Seat  Cover.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  the  width  equal  to  the  outside 
width  of  the  ell  seat  box,  and  length  equal  to  the  outside  length  of 
the  box. 


Construction : 

Make  two  Flower-  and  Book-Stands,  as  described  in 
Illustration  53,  and  provide  slot  opening  in  one  to  re- 
ceive the  seat;  also  provide  a  seat  support  as  described 
for  the  Window-seat.  Make  the  legs  IS1^  inches  long. 
Remove  the  covers,  Nail  a  leg  on  the  corner  of  each  box, 


BOX  FUKNITUKE 


229 


allowing  them  to  project  below  the  bottom,  having  their 
other  ends  even  with  the  open  top  end.  Make  a  cover 
for  the  box  which  is  to  form  the  ell  portion  of  the  seat, 
putting  a  cleat  near  each  end  on  the  under  side.  This 
box  will  form  the  short  or  ell  portion  of  the  seat  and  will 
stand  at  a  right  angle  to  the  long  portion  of  the  seat, 
with  one  flower-stand  at  its  outer  end.  The  cover  of  the 
box  will  form  the  seat  and  will  not  be  hinged.  The 
end  of  the  long  seat  will  be  supported  by  a  box  placed 
under  it  in  the  corner. 


230 


BOX  FUENITUEE 


SINGLE  WARDROBE 


Illustration  84 


Figure  1 


This  is  made  with  the  hat  compartment  door  opening 
on  the  left. 


Requirements : 

Body.  2  Washing-powder  Boxes  (8%  in.  deep,  15%  in.  wide. 
30  in.  long).  1  Long  Packing-box  (15%  in.  deep,  30  in.  wide,  6  ft. 
long) . 

Legs.  4  Strips  y2  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  by  twice  the  outside 
depth  of  the  small  boxes  and  the  outside  length  of  the  packing- 
box  combined.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  by  twice  the 


BOX  rUENITUEE  231 

outside  depth  of  the  small  boxes  and  the  outside  length  of  the 
packing-box  combined. 

Cleats.  2  Strips  */2  in-  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  and  1  in.  shorter 
than  the  width  of  the  door. 

Hardware.  2  porcelain  pull-knobs.  2  4  in.  tee  hinges.  4  l^ 
in.  butts  and  screws.  3  screws  1  in.  long,  to  screw  on  buttons. 
3  wooden  buttons,  for  fastening  doors. 

False  Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wider  than  the  outside 
width  and  3  in.  longer  than  the  outside  length  of  the  small  boxes. 

Construction : 

Make  the  length  of  the  legs  twice  the  outside  depth  of 
the  small  boxes  and  the  outside  length  of  the  packing-box 
combined. 

Take  one  end  out  of  one,  and  one  side  out  of  the  other 
small  box,  and  put  the  covers  back  on  the  boxes.  Set  one 
box  flat  on  the  floor,  and  stand  the  packing-box  on  end 
on  top  of  it.  If  the  packing-box  is  not  the  right  size,  it 
will  have  to  be  taken  apart  and  its  boards  cut  to  the 
proper  dimensions.  When  it  is  the  same  size  in  width 
and  depth  as  the  small  box,  nail  the  two  boxes  together, 
the  openings  on  the  same  side,  and  clinch  the  nails. 
These  two  boxes  make  the  compartments  for  clothes  and 
for  shoes. 

Put  the  other  small  box  on  the  floor.  Set  the  packing- 
box,  upside  down,  on  top  of  it,  having  the  opening  of  the 
small  box  at  right  angles  with  the  opening  of  the  pack- 
ing-box. Nail  the  boxes  together  evenly,  and  turn  the 
wardrobe  right  side  up.  The  second  small  box  makes 
the  hat  compartment.  Nail  the  false  top  over  the  top  of 
the  hat  compartment.  It  should  project  l^  inches  be- 
yond each  edge. 

Nail  the  legs  to  the  corners  of  the  wardrobe.  Their 
tops  should  reach  to  the  false  top,  and  they  should  extend 


232  BOX  FUKNITUKE 

4  inches  below  the  bottom.  Be  sure  the  legs  are  even, 
then  stand  the  wardrobe  upright  on  them. 

Make  the  wardrobe  door.  Let  it  fit  easily  between  the 
legs  and  extend  from  the  bottom  of  the  hat  compartment 
down  to  the  bottom  of  the  shoe  compartment.  Nail  the 
cleats  on  the  door  8  inches  from  each  end.  Place  the 
tee  hinges  1  foot  from  each  end  and  hang  the  door. 
Screw  the  knob  in  the  middle,  2  inches  from  the  outer 
edge.  Screw  the  buttons  on  the  legs  1  foot  from  each 
end  of  the  door. 

The  side  removed  from  the  small  box  cut  shorter  will 
make  a  door  for  the  hat  compartment.  Hang  it  from  the 
top,  as  shown  in  Illustration  85,  and  put  on  a  knob  and 
button. 

The  clothes-hanger  support  inside  the  wardrobe  is 
made  of  a  broom  handle  y2  inch  shorter  than  the  width 
of  the  clothes  compartment.  Make  two  blocks,  3  inches 
square  and  %  inch  thick.  Bore  a  hole  the  size  of  the 
broom  handle  through  the  middle  of  each  block.  Slip 
the  broom  handle  through  the  blocks,  and  nail  the  blocks 
to  the  sides  of  the  wardrobe  2  inches  from  the  top.  Many 
clothes-hangers  may  be  hung  upon  this  rod.  The  above 
description  is  for  a  man's  wardrobe.  The  only  differ- 
ence, however,  between  that  and  the  woman's  wardrobe 
is  in  the  height  of  the  shoe  compartment,  which  is  15 
inches  high  instead  of  8*4  inches.  The  increased  height 
is  obtained  by  removing  the  cover  also  from  the  lower 
small  box  and  moving  the  lower  end  of  the  packing-box 
in  about  6%  inches. 


BOX  FURNITUEE 


233 


DOUBLE  WARDROBE 


Illustration  85 


Figure  1 


Make  two  Single  Wardrobes,  as  per  Illustration  84, 
and  place  them  on  the  floor  near  one  corner  of  the  room. 
Fit  a  broom-handle  bar  between  them  at  the  top  of  the 
wardrobes.  A  curtain  hung  from  this  bar  will  make  a 
convenient  recess  for  hanging  outdoor  wraps  in  the  cor- 
ner between  the  two  wardrobes. 

The  doors  of  the  double  wardrobe  and  of  the  hat  com- 
partments should  be  hung  in  such  a  manner  as  to  open, 
one  right  and  the  other  left  hand,  as  shown  in  the  illus- 
tration. 


234 


BOX  FURNITURE 


SPITZBERGEN  SIDEBOARD 


Illustration  86 


Figures  1  and  2 


Requirements : 

Side  Cupboards.  2  Dynamite  Boxes  (about  11  in.  deep,  11  in. 
wide,  22  in.  long). 

Center  Cupboard.  1  Carbonite  Box  (about  10  in.  deep,  12  in. 
wide,  31  in.  long). 

Drawer.  1  Picture  Box  (about  5  in.  deep,  10  in.  wide,  31  in. 
long). 

False  Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  iy2  in.  wider  than  the  outside 
depth  of  the  side  cupboard  box  with  the  cover  removed,  and  2  in. 
longer  than  twice  the  outside  width  of  the  side  cupboard  box  and 
the  outside  length  of  the  center  cupboard  box  added. 

Recess  Shelves.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  ^  in.  wider  than  the 
outside  depth  of  the  side  cupboard,  and  the  length  equal  to  the 
outside  length  of  the  center  cupboard  box. 

Cupboard  Shelves.     4  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  width  equal  to  the  in- 


BOX  FUENITUKE  235 

side  depth  of  the  box,  and  length  equal  to  the  inside  width  of  the 
box. 

Doors.     Made  from  the  covers  removed  from  the  boxes. 
Drawer  Partitions.     9  Pieces   %   in.  thick,  width  equal  to  the 
inside  depth  of  the  drawer  box,  and  length  equal  to  the  inside 
width  of  the  drawer,  box. 

Corner  Legs.     2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  55  in.  long. 
2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2%  in.  wide,  55  in.  long. 
2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  35  in.  long. 
2  Strips  *£  in.  thick,  2%  in.  wide,  35  in.  long. 
Facing  Strip  Legs.     4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2^  in.  wide,  35  in. 
long. 

Back  of  Eack.    1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  8  in.  wide,  2  in.  shorter  than 
the  false  top. 

Bottom  of  Back.    1  Strip  ^  in.  thick,  3^  in.  wide,  2  in.  shorter 
than  the  false  top. 

Top  of  Eack.     1  Strip  %  in.  thick,  2%  in.  wide,  1  in.  longer 
than  the  false  top. 

Center  Cupboard  Dividing  Strip.     1  Strip  %  in.  thick,  2y2  in. 
wide,  and  length  equal  to  the  outside  width  of  the  box. 
Hardware.    8  1%  in.  tee  hinges  and  screws. 
6  brass  pull -knobs. 
4  brass  buttons  and  screws. 
10  brass  screw-hooks. 


Construction : 

Make  two  legs  35  inches  and  two  55  inches  long.  Re- 
move the  covers  from  all  the  boxes.  Fit  and  nail  two 
shelves  in  each  of  the  cupboard  boxes,  forming  three 
equal  compartments  in  each.  Place  one  side  cupboard 
on  its  side  and  set  the  center  cupboard  on  its  end  upon  it, 
having  one  side  even  with  the  end  of  the  side  cupboard 
and  both  open  compartments  facing  the  same  way,  with 
the  edges  even,  and  nail  them  together.  Join  the  other  side 
cupboard  box  to  the  other  end  of  the  center  cupboard  box 
in  the  same  manner.  Turn  the  cupboards  upside  down 


236  BOX  FURNITUKE 

and  set  one  recess  shelf  on  the  center  cupboard  and  nail 
it.  Upon  this  set  the  drawer  box,  and  upon  the  drawer 
box  place  the  other  recess  shelf  and  nail  it.  Allow  both 
of  the  recess  shelves  to  project  y2  inch  outside  the  front 
edges  of  the  cupboards.  Put  on  the  corner  and  the  fac- 
ing strip  legs,  having  their  upper  ends  even  with  the  top 
of  the  cupboards,  their  other  ends  projecting  13  inches 
below  the  bottom  face  of  the  side  cupboards,  and  the 
recess  edge  of  the  facing  strip  legs  even  with  the  outside 
side  face  of  the  side  cupboard.  Stand  the  piece  upon  its 
legs  and  place  and  nail  the  top,  allowing  it  to  project  % 
inch  over  the  outside  face  of  the  legs  at  the  ends  and  in 
front,  having  its  back  edge  even  with  the  outside  face 
of  the  rear  legs.  It  will  be  necessary  to  cut  the  rear 
corners  of  the  top  to  allow  one  side  of  each  rear  leg  to 
set  in  about  1  inch.  Place  the  back  of  the  rack  across 
and  between  the  rear  projecting  legs  and  nail  it  to  their 
inside  faces,  having  its  upper  edge  even  with  the  top  of 
the  legs.  Put  the  top  of  the  rack  across  on  top  of  the 
legs  on  its  flat  side,  having  its  rear  edge  even  with  the 
back  edge  of  the  legs.  Set  the  rack  bottom  between  the 
legs  and  under  the  lower  edge  of  the  rack  back,  having 
its  rear  edge  against  the  inside  face  of  the  legs.  Nail 
both  the  top  and  bottom  of  the  rack  to  the  edge  of  the 
rack  back.  The  end  of  the  top  of  the  rack  will  project 
1  inch  over  the  outside  face  of  the  legs.  Gouge  a  groove 
in  the  top  face  of  the  rack  bottom,  extending  its  entire 
length  with  the  exception  of  two  inches  at  each  end. 
Have  it  %  inch  wide  and  ys  inch  deep,  and  %  inch  from 
the  front  edge,  to  prevent  the  saucers  from  sliding.  Cut 
off  the  projecting  corners  at  each  end  to  an  angle  of  45 
degrees,  as  the  shelf  will  project  1  inch  outside  the  front 


BOX  FUKNITUEE 


237 


edge  of  the  legs.  Place  the  saucers  in  the  rack  and  screw 
the  hooks  to  the  under  side  of  the  top  for  holding  the 
cups,  having  them  hang  between  the  saucers.  Fit  and 
nail  the  center  cupboard  division  strip  in  the  center  of 
the  cupboard,  having  its  outer  face  even  with  the  front 
edge  of  the  recess  shelves.  Fit  and  hang  the  doors  and 
screw  on  the  pull-knobs  and  the  buttons.  Fit  and  nail 
the  partitions  in  the  drawer,  spacing  them  about  3  inches 
apart,  or  to  suit  the  knives,  forks,  and  spoons  which  they 
will  contain. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


ALLENDALE  SIDEBOARD 


Illustration  87 


Figures  1  and  2 


Made  as  shown,  by  the  Allendale  boys  in  the  Bradley 
Republic.  A  relay  of  four  boys  took  turns  in  the  "box 
factory"  morning  and  afternoon.  Their  beaming  faces 
when  the  work  was  completed  showed  the  keen  interest 
of  all  in  creating  "our  sideboard, "  as  the  boys  expressed 
it  in  a  letter  to  me. 

It  consists  of  four  boxes  supported  in  pairs,  with  a 
recess  containing  shelves  between.  The  recess  is  closed 
across  the  back.  The  rear  legs  carry  up  and  support  a 
cup-and-saucer  rack.  The  space  between  the  rack  and 
the  sideboard  top  is  open.  The  compartments  at  each 
end  are  made  alike. 


BOX  FURNITURE  239 

Requirements  : 

Cupboards.  4  Canned-fruit  Boxes  (about  13  in.  wide,  12^  in. 
deep,  18  in.  long). 

Recess  Shelves.  3  Pieces  y2  in.  thick,  the  width  equal  to  the 
outside  length  of  the  box,  24  in.  long. 

Inside  Shelves.  2  Pieces  y2  in.  thick,  the  width  %  in.  less  than 
the  inside  depth  of  the  box,  and  the  length  equal  to  the  inside 
length  of  the  box.  2  Pieces  y2  in.  thick,  the  width  equal  to  the 
inside  depth  of  the  box,  and  the  length  equal  to  the  inside  length 
of  the  box. 

Shelf  Cleats.  8  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1  in.  wide,  and  the  length 
equal  to  the  inside  depth  of  the  box.  6  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in. 
wide,  and  the  length  equal  to  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Door  Cleats.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1  in.  wide,  and  the  length 
1  in.  less  than  the  inside  width  of  the  box. 

Legs.  2  Strips  y2  in.  thick,  1  y>  in.  wide,  8  in.  longer  than  twice 
the  outside  width  of  the  box.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  8  in. 
longer  than  twice  the  outside  width  of  the  box.  2  Strips  y2  in. 
thick,  iy2  in.  wide,  30  in.  longer  than  twice  the  outside  width  of 
the  box.  2  Strips  y2  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  30  in.  longer  than  twice 
the  outside  width  of  the  box. 

Back  of  Rack.  1  Strip  %  in.  thick,  6  in.  wide,  24  in.  longer 
than  twice  the  outside  depth  of  the  box. 

Top  of  Rack.  1  Strip  ^  in.  thick,  2%  in.  wide,  27  in.  longer 
than  twice  the  outside  depth  of  the  box. 

Bottom  of  Rack.  1  Strip  %  in.  thick,  2*/2  in.  wide,  24  in. 
longer  than  twice  the  outside  depth  of  the  box. 

Recess  Back.  1  Piece  y2  in.  thick,  the  width  twice  the  outside 
width  of  the  box,  30  in.  long. 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wider  than  the  outside  length 
of  the  box,  27  in.  longer  than  twice  the  outside  width  of  the  box. 

Facing  Strips.  4  Strips  y2  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  8  in.  longer 
than  twice  the  outside  width  of  the  box.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in. 
wide,  and  the  length  2%  in.  less  than  the  outside  depth  of  the  box. 

Hardware.  4  l^  in.  hinges  (butts)  and  screws.  2  pull-knobs. 
9  brass  hooks. 


240  BOX  FUKNITUEE 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs,  two  8  inches  and  two  30  inches 
longer  than  twice  the  outside  width  of  the  box.  Remove 
the  covers.  Lay  one  box  on  its  side  and  place  another 
box  upon  it  sidewise,  with  both  open  sides  facing  alike. 
Match  their  edges  and  nail  them  together,  driving  the 
nails  from  the  inside  of  the  top  box,  and  clinch  them  in 
the  lower  box.  Nail  the  cleats  on  the  inside  ends  of 
each  box  and  fit  the  shelves  in.  (They  need  not  be 
fastened.)  The  shelf  in  the  upper  box  will  be  y%  inch 
less  in  width  than  the  lower  ones,  to  allow  the  door  to 
close  without  the  door  cleats  striking  the  shelf.  Turn 
the  boxes  end  up  and  put  on  the  front  corner  leg,  also 
the  long  facing  strip  leg,  allowing  its  edge  to  project 
half  over  the  recess  to  hide  the  ends  of  the  recess  shelf 
cleats.  Nail  the  short  facing  strips  between  them,  the 
middle  one  directly  over  the  joint  of  both  boxes,  the 
upper  edge  of  the  top  one  even  with  the  upper  edge  of 
the  top  of  the  box,  and  the  lower  edge  of  the  bottom  one 
even  with  the  lower  edge  of  the  bottom  of  the  box.  Re- 
verse the  position  of  the  boxes  and  put  on  the  extended 
rear  leg,  keeping  it  the  same  distance  below  the  lower 
box,  so  the  cupboard  will  stand  level.  Fit  the  door  be- 
tween the  legs,  having  the  outer  face  of  both  the  door 
and  legs  even.  Put  the  cleats  on  the  inside  face  of  the 
door  and  hang  it.  Do  the  same  with  the  other  two 
boxes.  They  are  to  be  made  right-  and  left-handed  re- 
garding the  position  of  the  legs  and  the  hanging  of  the 
door.  Set  both  pairs  of  compartments  upon  their  legs, 
24  inches  apart  as  shown,  and  fit  and  nail  on  the  top, 
allowing  it  to  project  1  inch  at  the  ends  and  in  front  over 
the  outside  face  of  the  legs,  the  rear  edge  being  even  with 


BOX  FURNITURE 


241 


the  outside  face  of  the  rear  legs.  It  will  be  necessary  to 
cut  out  both  rear  corners  of  the  top  to  allow  the  legs  to 
set  in.  Put  on  the  recess  shelf  cleats,  keeping  the  lower 
edge  of  the  bottom  ones  even  with  the  lower  side  of  the 
bottom  box,  and  those  above  at  such  heights  as  will  be 
best  adapted  for  the  articles  to  be  placed  on  them.  Fit 
in  the  shelves  and  nail  their  ends  to  the  cleats.  Nail  the 
6-inch-wide  back  for  rack  across  the  rear  inside  face  of 
the  top  of  the  extended  legs,  and  put  on  the  top  and 
bottom  strips.  Gouge  or  plane  a  groove  in  the  bottom 
of  the  rack  %  inch  wide,  y8  inch  deep,  and  %  inch  back 
from  the  front  edge,  and  cut  off  the  projecting  corners 
at  each  end  to  an  angle  of  45  degrees,  as  the  shelf  will 
project  1  inch  outside  the  front  edge  of  the  legs.  Allow 
the  strip  to  butt  against  the  legs  at  the  back  below  the 
rack  back,  to  which  it  should  be  nailed.  Nail  through 
the  legs  into  the  ends  of  the  strip.  Put  the  recess  back 
on,  which  will  extend  from  the  under  side  of  the  top  to 
the  lower  edge  of  the  lower  shelf  cleats.  Each  end  will 
lap  about  3  inches  on  the  cupboards.  Arrange  the  saucers 
in  the  rack,  and  screw  a  hook  directly  below  each  one  for 
holding  the  cups. 


16 


242 


BOX  FUKNITUKE 


COPENHAGEN  SIDEBOARD 


Illustration  88 


Figures  1  and  2 


Made  of  seven  boxes,  the  four  larger  ones,  forming  the 
lower  section,  being  alike.  The  two  end  compartments 
are  open  at  the  side,  without  doors,  and  afford  ample 
space  for  a  table  set.  The  upper  section  consists  of  two 
boxes  of  equal  size,  with  a  wider  and  longer  box  set  be- 
tween them.  The  entire  sideboard  is  closed  at  the  back. 
Each  section  has  a  false  top  its  full  width  and  length. 
The  rear  legs  extend  to  the  top  of  the  upper  section. 


Requirements : 


LOWER  SECTION 


Body.     4  Butter  Boxes  (11  in.  deep,  16  in.  wide,  22  in.  long). 
Shelves.     4  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  the  width  equal  to  the  inside  depth 


BOX  FUKNITURE  243 

of  the  box,  and  the  length  equal  to  the  inside  width  of  the  box.  2 
Pieces  %  in.  thick,  the  width  equal  to  the  inside  depth  of  the  box, 
and  the  length  equal  to  the  inside  width  of  the  box. 

Shelf  Cleats.  8  Strips  *£  in.  thick,  1  in.  wide,  and  the  length 
equal  to  the  inside  depth  of  the  box.  4  Strips  */£  in.  thick,  1  in. 
wide,  and  the  length  equal  to  the  inside  depth  of  the  box. 

Doors.     Made  from  the  covers. 

Door  Cleats.  4  Strips  *£  in.  thick,  1  in.  wide,  1  in.  shorter  than 
the  width  of  the  door. 

Facing  Strips.  3  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  11  in.  longer 
than  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Legs.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1^  in.  wide,  11  in.  longer  than  the 
combined  heights  of  both  sections  and  the  thickness  of  the  top 
added.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  11  in.  longer  than  the 
combined  heights  of  both  sections  and  the  thickness  of  the  top 
added.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  11  in.  longer  than  the 
outside  length  of  the  box.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  11  in. 
longer  than  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Hardware.     4  tee  hinges  and  screws.     2  pull-knobs.     2  buttons. 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  1^  in.  wider  than  the  outside  depth 
of  the  box,  2  in.  longer  than  four  times  the  outside  width  of  the 
box. 

UPPER   SECTION 


Body.  2  Dried-fruit  Boxes  (3%  in.  deep,  11  in.  wide,  14  in. 
long).  1  Dried-fruit  Box  (3^  in.  deep,  14  in.  wide,  32  in.  long). 

Shelves.  4  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  the  width  equal  to  the  inside 
depth  of  the  box,  and  the  length  equal  to  the  inside  width  of  the 
small  box.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  the  width  equal  to  the  inside  depth 
of  the  box,  and  the  length  equal  to  the  inside  length  of  the  large 
box. 

Doors.     Made  from  the  covers. 

Facing  Strips.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1^  in.  wide,  and  the 
length  equal  to  the  outside  length  of  the  small  box. 

Top.  1  Piece  *£  in.  thick,  1  in.  wider  than  the  outside  depth  of 
the  box,  2  in.  longer  than  the  outside  length  of  the  large  and  twice 
the  outside  width  of  the  small  box. 

Hardware.  4  1%  in.  brass  butts  and  screws.  2  pull-knobs.  2 
brass  buttons. 


244  BOX  FURNITURE 

Construction : 

LOWER  SECTION 

Make  the  legs— two,  11  inches  longer  than  the  outside 
length  of  the  boxes ;  two,  11  inches  longer  than  the  com- 
bined outside  length  of  both  the  upper  and  lower  boxes 
and  the  thickness  of  the  top  added. 

Remove  the  covers  from  two  of  the  boxes  and  fit  and 
nail  the  shelves  in,  one  shelf  being  8  inches  from  one 
end  and  the  other  5  inches  from  the  other  end,  measured 
inside.  Nail  them  through  the  sides  into  the  ends  of  the 
shelves.  Lay  one  box  on  its  side  and  place  the  other  on 
its  side  upon  it.  Match  the  edges  and  nail  them  to- 
gether through  their  abutting  sides,  and  clinch  the  points 
of  the  nails. 

Remove  one  side  from  each  of  the  other  two  boxes,  and 
fit  and  nail  a  shelf  in  each  midway  its  length.  Place  one 
of  these  boxes  on  its  side  upon  the  other  two,  with  the 
open  side  up,  and  nail  to  the  one  below  it  as  before, 
having  the  outside  face  even  with  the  edges  of  the  open 
compartments  of  the  others.  Invert  them  and  place  and 
nail  the  last  box  in  the  same  manner.  Turn  them  flat 
side  down,  the  open  side  of  the  middle  compartments 
facing  up,  and  put  on  both  the  corner  and  the  facing 
strip  legs,  the  front  legs  having  their  upper  ends  even 
with  the  top  end  of  the  boxes,  allowing  all  their  lower 
ends  to  project  11  inches  below  the  other  end.  Nail  the 
cleats  to  the  inside  face  of  the  doors.  Fit  and  hang  the 
doors  and  turn  the  piece  face  down,  and  put  on  the  rear 
legs,  one  at  each  corner,  allowing  their  lower  ends  to  pro- 
ject 11  inches.  ( The  end  boxes  will  project  the  thickness 
of  the  covers  beyond  the  backs  of  the  middle  boxes.) 
Turn  the  sideboard  upon  its  legs  and  nail  on  the  top, 


BOX  FURNITURE  245 

having  its  rear  edge  even  with  the  back  face  of  the  rear 
legs,  allowing  it  to  project  y2  inch  over  the  outer  face 
of  the  legs  in  front  and  at  the  ends.  It  will  be  necessary 
to  cut  the  rear  corners  of  the  top  and  let  the  legs  in 
about  an  inch. 

TOP  SECTION 

Remove  the  covers  from  the  small  boxes  and  fit  and 
nail  the  shelves  in  place,  having  one  shelf  4  inches  from 
the  inside  face  of  one  end  and  the  other  shelf  3  inches  from 
the  inside  face  of  the  other  end.  Before  nailing  in  the 
shelves,  however,  bore  five  holes  in  each  shelf  about  1  inch 
from  the  edge,  the  holes  being  just  large  enough  in 
diameter  for  the  handles  of  the  spoons  to  pass  through. 
Fit  and  nail  the  shelf  in  the  larger  box,  placing  the  shelf 
midway  the  width  of  the  box.  Place  the  larger  box  on 
end,  and  upon  it  place  one  of  the  small  boxes  laid  on  its 
side,  the  open  compartments  all  facing  the  same  way. 
Nail  the  other  small  box  to  the  other  end,  matching  the 
edges  of  all  of  them  before  nailing  together.  Place  this 
section  upon  the  lower  section  between  the  rear  legs  and 
nail  the  legs  to  it.  Nail  on  the  facing  strips,  keeping  the 
outer  edge  of  the  end  ones  even  with  the  end  face  and  the 
inner  edges  of  the  inner  ones  even  with  the  inside  end 
face  of  the  middle  compartment.  Nail  on  the  top,  hav- 
ing it  even  with  the  rear  face  of  the  legs  and  allowing  it 
to  project  1/2  inch  over  the  outside  face  of  the  legs  at  the 
ends  and  front.  Fit  and  hang  the  doors,  having  their 
outer  faces  even  with  the  outer  face  of  the  facing  strips. 

Make  a  groove,  14  inch  wide  and  l/$  inch  deep,  the 
entire  length  of  the  shelf,  and  a  similar  groove  in  the 
bottom  of  the  cup-and-saucer  compartment,  2  inches  back 


246 


BOX  FUEN1TUEE 


from  the  front  edge,  to  keep  the  saucers  from  sliding  for- 
ward. Place  the  saucers  in  position  and  screw  hooks  to 
the  under  side  of  the  shelf  and  to  the  top  of  the  upper 
compartment,  in  line  with  the  center  of  the  saucers,  on 
which  to  hang  the  cups.  Screw  on  the  pull-knobs  and 
buttons. 


CHAPTER  XII 

THE  SAME  PRINCIPLES  AS  CHAPTER  XI  WITH 
THE  ADDITION  OF  FRAMEWORK 


3>ining*1Room 


FLAG  WALL  RACK  CHINA  CLOSET 

ALLENDALE  SIDEBOARD 
GREEK-CROSS  TABLE         MINIATURE  PLANT-BOXES 

VINE  VASES 

ROLLING  SOILED-DISH  STAND       BABY'S  HIGH  CHAIR 
PICTURE  FRAME  NO.  2 

Color  Scheme: 
Flemish  oak. 
Soft  green. 

Woodwork  : 

Flemish  oak. 

Furniture  : 

Flemish  oak. 

Walls  : 

Soft  green. 

Drop  Ceiling: 

Light  green,  with  motif  stenciled  in  moss  green. 

Hangings  and  Table-covers: 

Russian  crash,  with  motif  appliqued  or  stenciled  in 
same  color  as  walls. 

Curtains: 
White. 

China  : 

White. 

Pottery  : 
Green. 

Floor: 

Stained  same  color  as  furniture. 

Plants: 

Growing  ivy  and  plants  with  crimson  blossoms  the 
same  color  as  the  flags;  yellow  or  old-rose  flowers  if 
flags  are  not  used. 


Illustration  89 


CHAPTER  XII 


CORNER  WASHSTAND 


One  box  placed  top  side  up,  one  end  removed  and 
circle  cut  in  cover.  One  box  placed  on  end,  one  side  re- 
moved and  hinged  as  door.  Shelf,  legs,  and  trim  added. 

Illustration  90 

COMBINATION  WASHSTAND  AND  WARDROBE 

A  combination  of  Illustration  89  and  Illustration  84. 


Illustration  91 


'  SHAVINGETTE  : 


One  box  placed  on  end,  cover  removed  and  hinged  as 
door.  Shelves,  legs,  mirror,  and  false  top  added. 

Illustration  92 

TRIPLE-MIRROR  DRESSING-TABLE 

Two  boxes  placed  on  end,  one  side  of  each  removed 
and  hinged  as  doors.  One  box  placed  top  side  up,  cover 
removed.  Shelves,  legs,  mirror  posts,  mirrors,  and  false 
top  added. 


Illustration  93 


DRESSING-TABLE 


Five  boxes  placed  top  side  up,  one  end  removed  from 
each  and  hinged  as  door.  One  box  placed  top  side  up, 
cover  removed  and  hinged  as  door.  Two  boxes  placed  on 
end,  cover's  removed.  Shelves,  legs,  mirror,  and  false  top 
added. 


Illustration  94 


WASHSTAND  AND  DRESSER 


Four  boxes  placed  top  side  up,  one  end  of  each  re- 
moved. One  box  placed  on  end,  cover  removed.  Four 
boxes  placed  on  end,  covers  of  all  removed  and  covers  of 
two  hinged  as  doors.  Shelves,  legs,  doors,  and  false  top 
added. 


Illustration  95 

CHILD'S  WASHSTAND  AND  DRESSER 

Four  boxes  placed  top  side  up,  one  end  of  each  re- 
moved. One  box  placed  on  end,  cover  removed.  Two 
boxes  placed  on  end,  covers  removed.  Legs,  doors,  and 
false  top  added. 

Illustration  96 

CHINA  CLOSET 

Three  boxes  placed  on  end,  covers  removed.  Shelves, 
doors,  legs,  and  false  top  added. 

Illustration  97 

HALL  STAND 

Three  boxes  placed  top  side  up,  each  one  cut  down. 
Three  boxes  placed  on  end,  covers  and  one  end  removed. 
One  box  placed  on  end,  cover  removed.  One  box  placed 
top  side  up,  cover  removed.  Legs,  facing  strips,  frame- 
work, and  mirror  added. 

Illustration  98 

BOY'S  DELIGHT 

Eight  boxes  placed  top  side  up,  covers  removed  from 
all  and  two  hinged  as  lids.  Legs  and  corner  trim  added. 

Illustration  99 

CLUB-ROOM  CORNER  SEAT 

Two  packing-boxes  placed  top  side  up,  covers  removed 
and  hinged  as  lids.  Legs  added.  Six  (small)  butter 
boxes  placed  at  end  of  packing-boxes,  one  upon  the  other, 
side  up,  one  side  removed  from  four  and  covers  from 
Two  silk  boxes  placed  on  end  at  side  of  butter  boxes, 
covers  removed.  Shelves  and  false  top  added.  Two  very 
long  boxes  made  to  fit  space  at  other  side  of  butter  boxes. 
Shelf  added.  Wall  protector  made  from  parts  of  ten  silk 
boxes  nailed  to  back  of  packing-boxes. 

Illustration  100 

COMBINATION   DESK,   READING -TABLE,    AND  BOOKCASE 

Eight  boxes  placed  on  end.  Covers  of  six  removed,  two 
hinged  as  doors.  One  side  of  two  removed.  One  box 
placed  top  side  up,  cover  removed.  Shelves,  legs,  trims, 
lamps,  and  false  top  added. 


top 
all. 


252 


BOX  FUKNITUKE 


CORNER  WASHSTAND 


Illustration  89 


Figure  1 


This  provides  a  towel  cupboard  below,  with  space  on 
either  side  for  a  pitcher  of  hot  and  cold  water. 

Above  this  is  a  compartment  wide  enough  to  place  a 
foot-tub.  This  compartment  is  made  from  practically  a 
square  box,  with  the  two  rear  corners  cut  off  at  an  angle 
of  45  degrees,  and  a  circular  opening  made  in  the  top  the 
size  of  the  wash-bowl.  The  foot-tub  may  be  used  for  the 
morning  bath,  and  also  as  a  receptacle  for  waste  water. 

The  upper  framework  (or  projecting  legs)  serves  as  a 
splasher  and  towel  rack. 


BOX  FUKNITUEE  253 

A  white  enameled  oil-cloth  is  nailed  over  the  top  and 
hangs  down  over  the  front,  covering  the  open  compart- 
ment. 

Requirements : 

Body.     1  Shoe  Box  (about  11  in.  deep,  23  in.  wide,  21  in.  long). 

Towel  Closet.  1  Condensed-milk  Box  (about  7*4  in.  deep,  13  in. 
wide,  19%  in.  long). 

Shelf.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  21  in.  wide,  12  in.  side  and  23  in. 
center  length. 

Shelf  Cleats.     2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  21  in.  long. 

Door.     Made  from  the  end  removed  from  the  closet  box. 

Legs.  5  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  54  in.  long.  5  Strips 
%  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  54  in.  long. 

Top  Facing  Strips.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  about 
14  in.  long.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  about  17  in.  long. 

Waterproof  Cover  and  Flap  Curtain.  1  square  yard  of  white 
enameled  oil-cloth. 

Hardware.  2  1^  in.  brass  hinges  (butts)  and  screws.  1  porce- 
lain pull-knob.  1  brass  button. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  54  inches  long.  Remove  both  sides  from 
the  box.  From  the  open  side  which  is  to  be  the  front, 
measure  12  inches  back  on  each  end,  and  from  these 
points  cut  off  (at  an  angle  of  45  degrees)  the  rear  cor- 
ners of  the  box.  Make  side  pieces  for  the  angle  openings 
thus  made  and  nail  them  in.  The  compartment  will  be 
open  in  front  only.  Cut  a  circular  opening  9  inches  in 
diameter  in  the  top  in  the  center  of  the  width,  the  edge 
of  the  opening  being  about  3  inches  from  the  front  of  the 
box.  Nail  on  the  legs,  allowing  them  to  project  261/? 
inches  below  the  bottom  face  of  the  box.  Remove  one 
side  from  the  closet  box.  Turn  the  piece  bottom  up,  rest- 
ing on  the  top  end  of  the  legs,  and  set  the  closet  box  in 


254  BOX  FUENITUKE 

place  and  nail  it.  Make  the  shelf  the  same  shape  as  the 
body  box  and  place  on  top  of  closet  and  nail  the  legs  to 
its  edges,  and  nail  the  shelf  to  the  closet.  Reverse  the 
stand,  turning  it  upon  its  legs.  Cut  and  fit  the  top  fac- 
ing strips  and  nail  them  to  the  projecting  leg  tops.  Fit 
and  hang  the  door  and  screw  on  the  pull-knob  and  the 
button.  Cover  the  top  of  the  stand  with  the  enameled 
cloth  and  fit  it  around  the  opening  as  described  for 
the  Office  Washstand,  Illustration  39.  In  cutting  the 
cloth,  arrange  to  have  it  fall  over  the  top  in  front  and 
hang  down  about  11  inches,  thus  forming  a  flap  curtain 
the  full  width  between  the  front  legs. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


255 


COMBINATION  WASHSTAND  AND 
WARDROBE 


Illustration  90 


Figure  1 


On  either  side  and  a  little  forward  of  the  Corner 
Washstand  (Illustration  89)  are  placed  two  Single 
Wardrobes  (Illustration  84),  both  facing  from  the 
"Washstand,  with  ample  space  between  them  to  permit 
one  to  bathe  behind  a  hanging  curtain  placed  between 
and  at  the  front  of  the  wardrobes,  which,  when  drawn, 
incloses  the  space. 


256 


BOX  FURNITURE 


1, 

till,, 

2J 

Vp 

X 

~^===^t 

o 

H 

"SHAVINGETTE 


Illustration  91 


Figures  1  and  2 


Requirements : 

Body.  1  Carpet-sweeper  Box  (11%  in.  deep,  15%  in.  wide, 
55%  in.  long»cut  down  to  40  in.  long). 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wider  and  2%  in.  longer  than 
the  outside  size  of  the  end  of  the  box. 

Shelves.  3  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  by  the  depth  and  the  width  of 
the  inside  of  the  box. 

Door.     Made  from  the  cover  of  the  box. 

Door  Cleats.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  5  in.  shorter  than 
the  outside  width  of  the  box. 


BOX  FUKN1TURE  257 

Mirror  Strips.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  and  the  length 
equal  to  the  outside  width  of  the  box. 

Top  Mirror  Strip.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  3  in.  longer 
than  the  outside  width  of  the  box. 

Legs.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  66  in.  long.  2  Strips 
%  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  66  in.  long.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in. 
wide,  50  in.  long.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  50  in.  long. 

Mirror.  10^  in.  wide,  and  the  length  equal  to  the  outside 
width  of  the  box. 

Hardware.  2  4  in.  tee  hinges  and  screws.  1  porcelain  pull- 
knob.  1  button. 

Construction : 

Make  two  legs  50  inches  and  two  legs  66  inches  long. 
Remove  the  cover.  Fit  in  and  fasten  the  shelves  at  suit- 
able heights.  Nail  the  two  short  legs  on,  keeping  their 
ends  at  one  end  of  the  box  even  with  the  outside  face, 
allowing  them  to  project  about  10  inches  over  the  other 
end  of  the  box.  Turn  the  box  over  and  nail  on  the  long 
legs  in  such  a  manner  that  all  four  legs  will  project 
equally  at  one  end,  and  the  last  two  legs  will  then  project 
about  16  inches  at  the  other  end,  forming  a  frame  in 
which  to  fasten  the  mirror.  Stand  the  box  upon  its  legs 
and  fit  and  nail  on  the  top,  allowing  it  to  project  % 
inch  over  the  outside  face  of  the  legs  in  front  and  at  both 
ends,  keeping  the  rear  edge  even  with  the  outside  face 
of  the  rear  legs.  It  will  be  necessary  to  cut  the  top 
slightly  on  each  side  so  as  to  fit  it  around  the  rear  legs. 
Cut  a  rabbet  14  inch  wide,  as  deep  as  the  thickness  of 
the  mirror  glass,  on  one  edge  of  each  strip,  thus : 


17 


258  BOX  FURNITURE 

Nail  one  strip  on  the  inside  face  of  the  rear  leg,  keep- 
ing the  rabbeted  edge  at  the  top  and  in  the  rear. 
The  bottom  edge  of  this  strip  should  be  2  inches  above 
the  top  of  the  ' '  Shavingette. "  Set  the  mirror  between 
the  rear  projecting  legs,  with  its  lower  edge  in  the  rabbet 
and  its  rear  face  against  the  inner  face  of  the  rear  legs. 
Place  the  other  mirror  strip  across  the  top,  with  the  top 
edge  of  the  glass  in  the  rabbet,  and  the  top  edge  of  the 
strip  even  with  the  upper  ends  of  the  legs.  Place  the 
top  mirror  strip  across  the  top  of  the  legs  on  its  flat  side, 
keeping  its  back  edge  even  with  the  rear  outside  face  of 
the  legs,  each  end  projecting  1  inch  over  the  outside  face 
of  the  leg.  Put  the  cleats  on  the  door  and  fit  and  hang  it. 
Screw  on  the  pull-knob  and  the  button. 


BOX  FURNITUKE 


259 


TRIPLE-MIRROR  DRESSING-TABLE 

Illustration  92  Figures  1,2,  and  3 


The  recess  is  made  of  sufficient  width  and  height  to 
receive  the  Dressing-table  Chair  when  it  is  not  in  use. 

Requirements : 

Drawer.  1  Condensed-milk  Box  (about  7^4  in-  deep,  13  in. 
wide,  19%  in.  long). 

Cupboards.  2  Soap  Boxes  (about  11%  in.  deep,  14*4  in-  wide, 
20  in.  long). 

Excess  Shelf.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  the  width  equal  to  the  out- 
side width  of  the  cupboard  box,  and  the  length  equal  to  the  outside 
length  of  the  drawer  box. 

Cupboard  Shelves.  4  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  the  width  equal  to  the 
inside  width  of  the  box,  and  the  length  equal  to  the  inside  depth  of 
the  box. 

Doors.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  narrower  than  the  outside 
depth  of  the  box,  and  the  length  equal  to  the  outside  length  of  the 
box. 


260  BOX  FURNITUEE 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wider  than  the  outside  length  of 
the  cupboard  box  with  the  cover  removed,  by  3  in.  longer  than  the 
outside  length  of  the  drawer  and  twice  the  outside  depth  of  the 
cupboard  box  added. 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  36  in.  long.  4  Strips 
%  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  36  in.  long. 

Mirror  Posts.     2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  26  in.  long. 

Back.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  12  in.  wide,  6  in.  shorter  than  the 
top. 

Mirrors.  1  Framed  Mirror,  14%  in.  wide,  19%  in.  long,  outside 
measurements  of  the  frame.  2  Framed  Mirrors,  11  in.  wide,  14% 
in.  long,  outside  measurements  of  the  frames. 

Hardware.  4  1%  in.  brass  hinges  (butts)  and  screws.  4  brass 
pull-knobs.  2  small  brass  hooks  with  screws  and  screw-eyes  for 
fastening  cupboard  doors.  4  3  in.  tee  hinges  for  cupboards. 


Construction : 

Make  the  corner  legs  36  inches  long.  Remove  one  end 
from  each  of  the  cupboard  boxes.  Place  and  nail  the 
shelves  in  each,  and  set  them  both  on  their  sides,  spaced 
apart  the  length  of  the  drawer  box.  Place  and  nail  the 
top  to  them,  allowing  it  to  project  %  inch  at  the  rear 
and  li/2  inches  at  the  ends  and  in  front.  Reverse  and 
remove  the  cover  from  the  drawer  box,  and  set  it  upside 
down  between  the  cupboards.  Place  the  recess  shelf  upon 
the  drawer,  match  the  edges,  and  nail  it  securely  in  place. 
Nail  the  legs  on  and  place  the  back  between  the  rear  legs, 
having  its  lower  edge  even  with  the  bottom  of  the  cup- 
boards, with  its  outer  face  even  with  the  outer  face  of 
the  legs,  and  nail  it  to  the  cupboards,  then  stand  the 
table  upon  its  legs.  Place  the  front  face  of  the  drawer 
even  with  the  front  face  of  the  cupboards,  and  nail  a 
strip  or  block  on  the  shelf  behind  the  drawer  to  prevent 
its  pushing  in  too  far.  The  block  or  strip  can  be  put  on 


BOX  FUKNITURE 


261 


through  the  opening  in  the  rear.  Put  the  mirror  posts 
on  the  rear  face  of  the  cupboards,  their  lower  ends  rest- 
ing on  the  top  edge  of  the  back,  having  their  inner  side 
edges  even  with  the  side  faces  of  the  cupboards.  It  will 
be  necessary  to  cut  y2  inch  by  the  width  of  the  post  out 
of  the  top  for  each  post  to  set  in.  The  post  will  stand 
about  17%  inches  above  the  top  of  the  table.  Midway 
the  height  of  the  large  mirror,  bore  a  hole  %6  incn  in 
diameter  and  1  inch  deep  in  the  ends  of  the  mirror  frame 
and  through  both  posts,  as  shown  by  dotted  lines  in  the 
illustration.  Put  a  stout  wire  nail  3  inches  long  through 
the  holes  in  each  post,  with  the  point  end  in  the  mirror 
frame,  for  the  large  mirror  to  swing  on.  Hang  the  side 
mirrors  to  the  posts  with  four  of  the  brass  butts. 

Home-made  mirror  frames  may  be  made  by  using  the 
grooved  edge  of  a  board  %  inch  thick  and  2  inches  wide. 
Miter  the  corners  and  nail  or  glue  them  with  hot  glue. 
Put  three  sides  together,  slip  the  glass  in,  and  secure  the 
other  side. 


262 


BOX  FURNITUKE 


DRESSING-TABLE 


Illustration  93 


Figures,!  and  2 


Requirements : 

Cupboards  and  Body.  5  Condensed-milk  Boxes  (about  7*4  in. 
deep,  13  in.  wide,  19%  in.  long).  1  Croquet  Box  (about  6  in.  deep, 
7  in.  wide,  40  in.  long).  2  Raisin  Boxes  (about  1%  in.  deep,  9^ 
in.  wide,  20  in.  long). 

Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  26  in.  long.  4  Strips 
y2  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  26  in.  long. 

Lower  Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wider  than  the  outside 
length  of  the  cupboard  boxes,  3  in.  longer  than  three  times  their 
outside  width. 

Upper  Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  1  in.  wider  than  the  outside 
depth  of  the  raisin  boxes  after  the  covers  have  been  removed,  2  in. 
longer  than  the  outside  length  of  the  croquet  box. 

Shelves.  6  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  the  width  equal  to  the  inside 
depth  of  the  raisin  box,  and  the  length  equal  to  the  inside  width  of 
the  raisin  box. 

Facing  Strips.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  and  the  length 
iy2  in.  longer  than  twice  the  outside  depth  of  the  cupboard  box. 


BOX  FURNITURE  263 

2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  2^4  in.  shorter  than  the  outside 
width  of  the  box. 

Mirror.    1  Framed  Mirror,  about  16  in.  by  20  in.  outside. 

Hardware.  6  1^  in.  butts  and  screws.  3  small  pull-knobs.  3 
brass  buttons. 

Construction : 

LOWER  SECTION 

M#ke  the  legs  26  inches  long.  Remove  the  ends  only 
from  the  five  boxes.  Set  two  boxes  on  their  sides,  one 
upon  the  other;  match  their  edges  and  nail  them  to- 
gether. Do  the  same  with  the  third  box,  and  have  all 
their  open  ends  facing  the  same  way.  Lay  all  three 
boxes  flat  side  down  on  the  floor  and  place  the  two  re- 
maining boxes,  top  side  up,  one  upon  each  end  box  of  the 
three,  with  all  open  ends  facing  the  same  way.  Match 
their  edges  and  nail  them  to  the  boxes  beneath  them.  Turn 
them  completely  over  upon  the  two  last-added  boxes. 
Fit  and  nail  on  the  top,  allowing  it  to  project  U/o  inches 
at  the  ends  and  in  front  and  1/2  mc^  a^  the  back  edge. 
Reverse  the  section  and  nail  on  the  legs.  Fit  and  nail 
on  the  facing  strips,  keeping  those  edges  of  the  vertical 
strips  which  face  each  other  even  with  the  inside  end 
face  of  the  middle  cupboard,  allowing  the  strip  to  project 
slightly  over  the  pair  of  compartments  on  each  side. 
Have  the  upper  edge  of  the  horizontal  strips  even  with 
the  bottom  of  the  lower  compartment.  Fit  and  hang  the 
doors,  screw  on  the  knobs  and  buttons,  and  turn  the  sec- 
tion upon  its  legs. 

UPPER  SECTION 

Place  the  croquet  box  on  top  of  the  section.  Set  the 
back  of  the  box  even  with  the  back  edge  of  the  top,  and 


264 


BOX  FURNITURE 


nail  it  to  the  lower  section,  driving  the  nails  inside  the 
box,  through  the  bottom,  into  the  top  of  the  lower  section. 
Fit  and  nail  the  shelves  in  the  raisin  boxes. 

The  lid  of  the  croquet  box  does  not  open  the  full  width 
of  its  cover,  but  is  hinged  to  a  strip  of  the  cover  about 
2  inches  wide  nailed  across  the  top  at  the  rear.  Place 
the  raisin  boxes  on  end  upon  this  strip,  one  at  each  end  of 
the  croquet  box,  having  the  outside  side  face  even  with 
the  end  of  this  box.  Place  the  upper  top  across  the  top  of 
the  boxes  and  nail  it  to  them,  allowing  it  to  project  1 
inch  at  each  end  and  in  front,  keeping  the  rear  edge 
even  with  the  rear  face  of  the  boxes. 

Secure  a  piece  of  mirror  glass  and  make  a  frame  for  it 
of  strips  1  inch  thick  and  2  inches  wide.  Groove  the 
strips  with  a  grooving-plane  to  receive  the  glass,  and 
miter  and  nail  the  corners  together.  The  mirror  frame 
is  hung  on  two  screws,  one  on  each  side,  screwed  through 
the  sides  of  the  raisin  boxes  into  the  mirror  frame  at  a 
point  midway  of  its  height. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


265 


WASHSTAND  AND  DRESSER 


Illustration  94 


Figures  1  and  2 


Provides  space  for  toilet  articles,  underwear,  ties, 
men's  furnishings,  shaving  materials,  photographs,  and 
knickknacks. 

This  piece  was  made  to  meet  a  need  in  the  far  North, 
where  the  small  accommodations  required  an  article  that 
would  contain  all  the  necessary  toilet  outfit  and  accesso- 
ries needed  by  a  man.  The  space  below  the  mirror  is 
open  and  has  two  broom-handle  supports  across  it.  A 
splasher  hangs  from  the  lower  support  and  towels  hang 
upon  the  upper  one. 


266  BOX  FUEN1TUEE 

Requirements : 

Lower  Cupboards.  4  Condensed-milk  Boxes  (about  7^4  in.  deep, 
13  in.  wide,  19%  in.  long). 

Middle  Compartment.  1  Small  Packing-box  (about  14*£  in. 
deep,  20  in.  wide,  21  in.  long). 

Upper  Cupboard.  4  India-relish  Boxes  (7*4  in.  deep,  12*4  in. 
wide,  16%  in.  long). 

Shelves.  4  Pieces  y2  in.  thick,  the  width  equal  to  the  depth  of 
the  box,  and  the  length  equal  to  the  width  of  the  box. 

Lower  Top.  1  Piece  y2  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wider  than  the  length 
of  the  lower  cupboard  box  by  2  in.  longer  than  the  packing-box 
and  twice  the  width  of  the  lower  cupboard  box  combined. 

Upper  Top.  1  Piece  V2  in.  thick,  1  in.  wider  than  the  outside 
depth  of  the  box,  2  in.  longer  than  the  packing-box  and  twice  the 
width  of  the  lower  cupboard  box  combined. 

Doors.  2  Pieces  y2  in.  thick,  2  in.  narrower  than  the  outside 
width  of  the  cupboard  box,  and  the  length  twice  the  outside  depth 
of  the  cupboard  box. 

Facing  Strips.  4  Strips  %  in,  thick,  1*4  in.  wide,  and  the  length 
twice  the  outside  length  of  the  upper  compartment  box.  4  Strips 
y2  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  12  in.  longer  than  twice  the  outside  depth 
of  the  lower  cupboard  boxes.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  and 
the  length  3  in.  shorter  than  the  lower  cupboard  boxes.  8  Strips  % 
in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  iy2  in.  shorter  than  the  depth  of  the  upper 
compartment  boxes. 

Legs.  2  Strips  y2  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  12  in.  longer  than 
twice  the  outside  depth  of  the  lower  cupboard  boxes.  2  Strips  y2 
in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  12  in,  longer  than  twice  the  outside  depth  of 
the  lower  cupboard  boxes.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  iy2  in.  wide,  12^ 
in.  longer  than  twice  the  outside  length  of  the  upper  compartment 
box  and  twice  the  outside  depth  of  the  lower  cupboard  boxes  com- 
bined. 2  Strips  y2  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  12^  in.  longer  than  twice 
the  outside  length  of  the  upper  compartment  box  and  twice  the 
outside  depth  of  the  lower  cupboard  boxes  combined. 

Supports.    3  Broom  Handles. 

Hardware.  4  brass  buttons.  4  hinges,  1*4  in.  (butts).  4  pull- 
knobs.  2  hooks.  4  1%  in.  tee  hinges. 

Mirror.    1  Mirror. 


BOX  FURNITUBE  267 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs,  two  12  inches  longer  than  twice  the  out- 
side depth  of  the  lower  cupboard  boxes,  and  two  121/2 
inches  longer  than  twice  the  outside  depth  of  the  lower 
cupboard  boxes  and  twice  the  outside  length  of  the  upper 
boxes  combined.  Remove  the  ends  from  the  four  lower 
cupboard  boxes  and  the  cover  from  the  packing-box. 
Lay  two  lower  cupboard  boxes  on  their  sides  one  upon 
the  other,  and  nail  together  through  the  abutting  sides. 
Do  the  same  with  the  other  two  lower  cupboard  boxes. 
Make  the  packing-box  the  same  width  as  the  depth  of  a 
pair  of  the  lower  cupboard  boxes.  Place  the  packing-box 
on  its  end  and  set  a  pair  of  the  lower  cupboard  boxes  on 
their  sides  upon  it.  Match  their  edges  and  nail  together. 
Join  the  other  pair  to  the  other  end  of  the  packing-box 
in  the  same  manner,  having  all  the  openings  facing 
alike.  Turn  them  all  over  so  the  openings  will  all  face 
up,  and  put  on  the  corner  legs  and  the  facing  strip  legs. 
Reverse,  having  the  openings  down,  and  nail  on  the  rear 
legs,  allowing  all  the  legs  to  project  12  inches  below  the 
bottom  face.  Turn  it  right  side  up  on  its  legs  and  nail 
the  top  on,  having  its  rear  edge  even  with  the  outside 
face  of  the  rear  legs,  allowing  it  to  project  at  the  ends 
and  in  front  %  inch  over  the  outside  face  of  the  legs. 
Remove  the  covers  from  two  of  the  remaining  boxes. 
Stand  one  box  on  its  end  and  set  another  box  upon  it 
endwise,  then  nail  together  and  put  in  the  shelves  at  the 
height  desired.  Do  the  same  with  the  other  two  boxes 
and  set  each  pair  in  its  place  on  the  top,  having  their 
backs  even  with  the  lower  portion  of  the  stand.  Put  the 
facing  strips  on  the  end  of  the  lower  portion  and  also  on 
the  ends  and  over  the  front  edge  of  each  of  the  upper 


268 


BOX  FURNITURE 


portions,  having  their  outer  edges  even  with  the  outside 
edge  of  the  closets.  Fit  and  hang  the  doors  and  screw 
on  the  pull-knobs  and  buttons.  Screw  two  hooks  in  the 
under-side  edge  of  the  top  of  the  packing-box,  and  cut 
and  lay  a  broom  handle  in  them,  upon  which  may  be  ar- 
ranged a  sliding  curtain.  Cut  two  broom  handles  to  fit 
between  the  upper  closets,  and  place  them  about  as 
shown,  and  fasten  them  with  a  nail  driven  through  the 
side  of  the  closet  box  into  their  ends— the  lower  one  to 
carry  a  splasher  and  the  upper  one  for  towels.  A  mirror 
may  also  be  fitted  as  shown.  Put  on  the  upper  top,  keep- 
ing its  rear  edge  even  with  the  outer  face  of  the  rear  legs, 
allowing  it  to  project  y2  inch  over  the  outer  face  of  the 
legs  at  the  ends  and  y2  inch  over  the  facing  strips  in 
front. 


BOX  FUKNITUKE 


269 


CHILD'S  WASHSTAND  AND  DRESSER 

Illustration  95  Figure  1 


A  similar  style  of  Dresser  as  shown  in  Illustration 
94,  but  a  smaller  type  suitable  for  a  child,  being  made 
Avith  smaller  boxes  and  shorter  legs. 

The  upper  closed  compartment  and  one  towel  rack  are 
dispensed  with. 

Requirements : 

Cupboards.  4  Canned-soup  Boxes  (about  8^4  in.  deep,  ll^  in- 
wide,  1714  in-  long). 

Middle  Compartment.  1  Small  Packing-box  (about  16^5  in. 
square,  16^  in.  long). 

Upper  Compartments.  2  Borax-soap  Boxes  (about  6  in.  deep, 
10%  in.  wide,  18%  in.  long). 

Lower  Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  1%  in-  wider  than  the  length 
of  the  cupboard  boxes,  by  2  in.  longer  than  the  packing-box  and 
twice  the  width  of  the  cupboard  box  combined. 


270  BOX  FURNITURE 

Upper  Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  1  in.  wider  than  the  outside 
depth  of  the  box,  2  in.  longer  than  the  packing-box  and  twice  the 
width  of  the  cupboard  box  combined. 

Doors.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  2%  in.  narrower  than  the  outside 
width  of  the  cupboard  box,  and  the  length  equal  to  twice  the  out- 
side depth  of  the  cupboard  box. 

Facing  Strips.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  114  in.  wide,  and  the 
length  equal  to  the  outside  length  of  the  upper  compartment  box. 
4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  6%  in.  longer  than  twice  the 
outside  depth  of  the  cupboard  boxes.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in. 
wide,  and  the  length  2%  in.  shorter  than  the  cupboard  boxes. 

Legs.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  6%  in.  longer  than 
twice  the  outside  depth  of  the  cupboard  boxes.  2  Strips  %  in. 
thick,  1%  in.  wide,  G1/^  in.  longer  than  twice  the  outside  depth  of 
the  cupboard  boxes.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  6l/2  in. 
longer  than  the  outside  length  of  the  upper  compartment  box  and 
twice  the  outside  depth  of  the  cupboard  boxes  combined.  2  Strips 
%  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  6%  in.  longer  than  the  outside  length  of 
the  upper  compartment  box  and  twice  the  outside  depth  of  the  soup 
boxes  combined. 

Rods.     2  Broom  Handles. 

Hardware.  2  brass  buttons.  4  hinges,  1^4  in.  (butts).  2  pull- 
knobs. 

Mirror.     1  Mirror. 


Construction : 

Make  the  legs,  two  6y2  inches  longer  than  twice  the 
outside  depth  of  the  cupboard  boxes,  and  two  6y2  inches 
longer  than  twice  the  outside  depth  of  the  cupboard 
boxes  and  the  outside  length  of  the  upper  compartment 
box  combined.  Remove  the  ends  from  the  four  cup- 
board boxes  and  the  cover  from  the  packing-box.  Lay  a 
cupboard  box  on  its  side  and  place  another  on  its  side 
upon  it,  and  nail  together  through  the  abutting  sides. 
Do  the  same  with  the  other  two  cupboard  boxes.  Make 
the  packing-box  the  same  width  as  the  depth  of  a  pair 


BOX  FURNITUEE  271 

of  cupboard  boxes,  then  place  the  packing-box  on  its  end 
and  set  a  pair  of  the  cupboard  boxes  on  their  sides  upon 
it.  Match  their  edges  and  nail  together.  Join  the  other 
pair  to  the  other  end  of  the  packing-box  in  the  same 
manner,  having  all  the  openings  facing  alike.  Turn 
them  all  over  so  the  openings  will  all  face  up,  and  put  on 
the  corner  and  the  facing  strip  legs,  having  the  edge  of 
the  facing  strips  even  with  the  inside  edge  of  the  middle 
compartment.  Reverse,  having  the  openings  down,  and 
nail  on  the  rear  legs,  allowing  all  the  legs  to  project  G1/^ 
inches  below  the  bottom  face.  Turn  it  right  side  up,  on 
its  legs,  and  nail  the  top  on,  having  its  rear  edge  even 
with  the  outside  face  of  the  rear  legs,  allowing  it  to  pro- 
ject at  the  ends  and  in  front  y2  inch  over  the  outside 
face  of  the  legs.  Remove  the  covers  from  the  remaining 
boxes  and  put  in  the  shelves  at  the  heights  desired.  Set 
each  box  in  its  place  on  the  top,  having  their  backs  even 
with  the  lower  portion  of  the  stand. 

Put  the  facing  strips  on  the  end  of  the  lower  portion 
and  also  over  the  front  edge  of  each  of  the  upper  por- 
tions, having  their  outer  edges  even  with  the  outside 
edge  of  the  box.  Fit  and  hang  the  doors  and  screw  on 
the  pull-knobs  and  buttons.  Screw  two  hooks  in  the 
under-side  edge  of  the  top  of  the  packing-box,  and  cut 
and  lay  a  broom  handle  in  them  upon  which  may  be 
arranged  a  sliding  curtain.  Cut  a  broom  handle  to  fit 
between  the  upper  boxes  and  place  it  about  as  shown,  to 
serve  as  a  towel  rack.  A  mirror  may  also  be  fitted  as 
shown.  Put  on  the  upper  top,  keeping  its  rear  edge  even 
with  the  outer  face  of  the  rear  legs,  allowing  it  to  pro- 
ject y2  inch  over  the  outer  face  of  the  legs  at  the  ends 
and  y2  inch  over  the  facing  strips  in  front. 


272 


BOX  FURNITURE 


CHINA  CLOSET 


Illustration  96 


Figure  1 


This  is  composed  of  two  side  closets,  each  fitted  with 
shelves  and  glazed  doors  hinged  upon  the  outer  face, 
there  being  three  lights  to  each  door.  Between  the 
closets  is  a  recessed  section,  the  lower  portion  of  which 
is  a  cupboard  with  an  open  compartment  directly  above 
for  water-pitcher,  the  recess  above  being  fitted  with  cup- 
and-saucer  shelves. 

The  cupboard  is  fitted  with  shelves  for  containing 
small  table  linen. 


Requirements : 

Body.  3  Carpet-sweeper  Boxes  (about  11%  in.  deep,  15%  in. 
wide,  55%  in.  long). 

Shelves.  19  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  the  width  equal  to  the  inside 
depth  of  the  box,  and  the  length  equal  to  the  inside  width  of  the 
box.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  2%  in.  wide,  and  the  length  equal  to 
the  inside  width  of  the  box. 


BOX  FUKNITUEE  273 

Top.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wider  than  the  outside  depth  of 
the  box,  and  3  in.  longer  than  the  outside  width  of  the  box  with 
the  thickness  of  the  side  of  the  box  added. 

Corner  Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  iy2  in.  wide,  6  in.  longer 
than  the  outside  length  of  the  box.  4  Strips  y2  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide, 
6  in.  longer  than  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Facing  Strip  Legs.  4  Strips  y2  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  6  in.  longer 
than  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Facing  Strips.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  2y2  in.  shorter 
than  the  outside  width  of  the  box.  2  Strips  y2  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide, 
2  in.  shorter  than  the  outside  width  of  the  box.  4  Strips  y2  in. 
thick,  2  in.  wide,  3  in.  shorter  than  the  outside  depth  of  the  box. 
1  Strip  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  3  in.  shorter  than  the  inside  width 
of  the  box.  1  Strip  y2  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  20^  in.  long.  (Verti- 
cal strip  between  the  cupboard  doors.) 

Cupboard  Doors.  2  Pieces  y2  in.  thick,  2  in.  narrower  than  one 
half  the  outside  width  of  the  box,  by  20^  in.  long. 

Sash  Door  Frames.  4  Strips  J/&  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  1  in.  longer 
than  the  outside  length  of  the  box.  4  Strips  y2  in.  thick,  2  in. 
wide,  2y2  in.  shorter  than  the  outside  width  of  the  box.  4  Strips  y2 
in.  thick,  1}4  in.  wide,  2y2  in.  shorter  than  the  outside  width  of  the 
box. 

Glass  Lights  for  Doors.  6  Window-glass  Lights,  2  in.  narrower 
than  the  inside  width  of  the  box,  by  2  in.  less  than  one  third  the 
outside  length  of  the  box. 

Hardware.  4  1%  in.  brass  hinges  (butts)  with  screws.  4  small 
brass  knobs.  2  brass  buttons  for  cupboard  doors.  6  2  in.  brass 
hinges  (butts)  and  screws.  2  brass  pull-knobs.  2  brass  hooks, 
screws,  and  screw-eyes  for  large  doors. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs  6  inches  longer  than  the  outside  length 
of  the  box.  Remove  the.  covers.  Fit  and  nail  seven 
shelves  each  in  two  of  the  boxes.  Space  the  shelves  to 
suit  the  various  pieces  of  china  they  are  to  contain.  Or, 
if  made  as  shown  in  the  illustration,  the  height  of  the 
respective  compartments,  naming  the  bottom  one  first, 

18 


274  BOX  FURNITURE 

then  each  consecutively  to  the  top,  would  be  as  follows: 
8  inches,  8  inches,  6  inches,  5  inches,  5  inches,  6  inches, 
6  inches,  7  inches.  Drive  the  nails  from  the  outside, 
through  the  sides  and  bottom  of  the  box,  into  the  edges 
of  the  shelves,  using  V/2  inch  wire  brads  spaced  not 
more  than  2  inches  apart.  Eemove  one  end  from  the 
third  box  and  set  it  in,  having  its  outer  face  22  inches 
from  the  other  end  to  form  a  cupboard  compartment, 
and  nail  it.  Fit  and  nail  three  shelves  evenly  spaced  in 
this  compartment.  Fit  and  nail  a  shelf  11  inches  from 
the  end  which  has  been  set  in,  to  form  the  compartment 
above  the  cupboard.  Eight  and  a  half  inches  from  this 
shelf  nail  one  of  the  21/2-incn-wi(ie  shelves,  and  the  other 
one  7  inches  from  this  last  one.  Place  one  of  the  end  closets 
on  its  side  upon  the  floor  and  set  the  middle  section  on 
its  side  upon  it,  having  both  open  compartments  facing 
the  same  way,  the  cupboard  compartment  being  directly 
over  the  largest  compartment  of  the  end  section  or 
closet.  Match  their  edges  and  nail  securely  together. 
Join  the  other  end  section  to  the  middle  one  in  a  similar 
manner.  Nail  on  the  corner  and  facing  strip  legs  (there 
being  two  of  the  latter)  on  both  front  and  rear.  Have 
them  project  evenly  over  each  compartment.  Stand  the 
closet  right  end  up  on  its  legs  and  set  the  tops  in  place 
and  nail  them,  allowing  them  to  project  l1/^  inches  over 
the  outside  face  of  the  closets  all  around.  Fit  the  top 
facing  strip  on  the  back  of  the  middle  section  between 
the  tops  of  the  end  sections.  It  should  project  l1/^ 
inches  into  the  recess  of  the  middle  section.  Put  on  the 
front  facing  strips  between  the  corner  and  facing  strip 
legs  at  both  the  top  and  bottom  of  the  closets.  The  upper 
edge  of  the  top  ones  bears  against  the  under  side  of  the 


BOX  FUKNITUBE  275 

top,  while  the  top  edge  of  the  lower  ones  is  even  with 
the  inside  face  of  the  bottom  of  the  closets.  The  lower 
facing  strips  across  the  ends  and  in  front  are  all  to  be 
at  the  same  level  and  in  line.  The  top  edge  of  the  facing 
strip  over  the  cupboard  doors  will  be  level  with  the  upper 
face  of  the  shelf.  Nail  the  ends  of  the  vertical  cupboard 
strip  to  horizontal  strips  above  and  below  it.  Fit  and 
hang  the  cupboard  doors  and  screw  on  the  pull-knobs  and 
buttons. 

Make  the  inside  width  of  the  sash  door  frame  the  same 
as  the  width  between  the  corner  leg  and  the  facing  strip 
leg,  and  the  inside  length  the  same  as  the  distance  be- 
tween the  facing  strips  at  the  top  and  bottom  of  the 
closet.  Halve  the  ends  of  the  frame  strips  and  glue  or 
nail  together,  and  cut  the  rabbet  for  the  glass  as  de- 
scribed for  Picture  Frame  No.  1,  Illustration  72.  The 
li/4-inch-wide  strips  should  be  rabbeted.  Place  two  across 
each  door  at  points  to  make  three  equal  panels.  Fit  and 
hang  the  doors,  put  in  the  glass  lights,  and  screw  on  the 
pull-knobs,  hooks,  and  screw-eyes. 


276 


BOX  FUENITUEE 


HALL  STAND 


Illustration  97 


Figures  1  and 


The  stand  provides  space  for  tennis  rackets  and  balls, 
umbrellas  and  overshoes,  guns  and  ammunition.  There 
is  a  drawer  for  gloves,  a  shelf  for  spy-glasses  and  clothes- 
brush,  and  hangers  for  hats  and  coats.  The  lower  row  of 
boxes  has  open  ends  facing  front,  while  the  three  boxes 
above  them  have  one  open  end  and  one  open  side  each. 
The  portion  above  these  is  mere  framework  without  any 


BOX  FUKNITURE  277 

back.  In  the  center  is  held  the  seventh  box,  standing  on 
end  with  its  cover  removed,  containing  shelves  and  a 
drawer  (the  eighth  box).  The  middle  space  above  the 
drawer  contains  a  mirror. 

Requirements : 

Body.  3  Condensed-milk  Boxes  (about  iy±  in.  deep,  13  in.  wide, 
19%  in.  long).  3  Butter  Boxes  (12^5  in.  deep,  13  in.  wide,  26  in. 
long).  1  Eaisin  Box  (about  3%  in.  deep,  10^  in.  wide,  18  in. 
long). 

Drawer.    1  Cigar  Box  (2%  in.  deep,  3*4  in.  wide,  9%  in.  long). 

Legs.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  5  ft.  10  in.  long.  2  Strips 
y2  in.  thick,  2^  in.  wide,  5  ft.  10  in.  long.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick, 
2  in.  wide,  about  37  in.  long.  2  Strips  ^  in.  thick,  2^  in.  wide, 
about  37  in.  long. 

Facing  Strips.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2%  in.  wide,  about  37  in. 
long- 
Intermediate  Legs.  2  Strips  *£  in.  thick,  2%  in.  wide,  5  ft.  10 
in.  long. 

Sundry  Facing  Strips.  14  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2%  in.  wide, 
about  15  in.  long. 

Crosspieces.  1  Strip  %  in.  thick,  2%  in.  wide,  40  in.  long.  2 
Strips  %  in.  thick,  2^  in.  wide,  39  in.  long. 

Hooks.     2  Pairs  Antlers  (or  their  equivalent). 

Mirror.     1  Mirror. 

Construction : 

Make  the  legs,  two  5  feet  and  10  inches  long,  and  two 
4  inches  longer  than  the  combined  outside  length  of  the 
butter  box  and  depth  of  the  milk  box.  Make  a  pencil 
line  completely  around  one  of  the  milk  boxes  12  inches 
from  one  end,  and  cut  the  box  in  two,  sawing  on  the  line. 
Do  the  same  with  two  others.  There  are  now  three  boxes 
12  inches  long,  each  open  at  one  end.  Place  one  of  these 
boxes  on  its  side,  and  upon  it  place  another  likewise,  the 
open  ends  facing  the  same  way.  Join  them  together  by 


278  BOX  FUKNITUBE 

nailing  through  the  abutting  sides.  Place  the  third  box 
in  the  same  way  upon  the  second  one  and  nail  it  in  the 
same  manner.  Match  all  their  edges  before  nailing. 
Kemove  the  covers  and  one  end  from  each  of  the  three 
butter  boxes,  and  place  and  join  them  together  the 
same  as  those  for  the  lower  compartments.  Clinch  the 
points  of  the  nails  which  join  them  so  that  they  may  be 
firmly  held  together.  Place  the  lower  set  of  boxes  on 
the  work  bench,  flat  side  down,  and  stand  the  upper  set 
on  their  ends  upon  them,  having  the  open  compartments 
facing  the  same  way  as  shown  in  the  illustration.  Match 
the  edges  of  both  sets  and  join  them  together.  Turn  both 
sets  over,  all  open  sides  of  the  compartments  facing  up, 
and  put  on  the  short  legs,  also  the  two  short  facing  strip 
legs  which  go  between  them,  having  their  upper  ends 
even  with  the  top  edge  of  the  upper  compartments,  the 
edges  of  the  strips  projecting  equally  on  each  side,  and 
all  the  legs  projecting  4  inches  below  the  bottom  face  of 
the  stand.  Reverse  the  stand  and  nail  on  the  long  corner 
legs  and  long  facing  strips  which  extend  between  them 
and  to  the  same  height.  Set  the  stand  right  end  up  on 
its  legs  and  nail  one  of  the  shorter  crosspieces  on,  placing 
its  edge  up  on  the  inner  face  of  the  rear  corner  legs,  and 
nail  it  to  them  and  to  the  long  facing  strips,  keeping  its 
upper  edge  12  inches  below  the  top  of  the  legs.  Put  the 
other  crosspiece  of  the  same  length  on  in  the  same  man- 
ner, having  its  upper  edge  even  with  the  top  of  the  legs. 
Nail  the  last  and  longer  crosspiece  to  the  top  of  the  legs 
and  to  the  edge  of  the  last  crosspiece  put  on,  having  its 
rear  edge  even  with  the  rear  face  of  the  legs.  Fit  and 
nail  two  rows  of  facing  strips  across  the  front  of  the 
lower  compartments,  having  the  bottom  edge  of  the  lower 


BOX  FUKNITUEE 


279 


ones  even  with  the  bottom  face  of  the  stand,  and  the 
bottom  edge  of  the  upper  ones  even  with  the  inside  top 
face  of  the  lower  compartments.  Put  a  facing  strip  on 
the  top  of  the  front  legs,  having  its  ends  and  outer  edge 
even  with  the  outer  face  of  the  legs.  Put  a  facing  strip 
across  each  end  from  the  front  one  to  the  inner  face  of 
the  rear  leg,  cutting  it  out  to  allow  one  side  of  the  rear 
leg  to  set  in  so  that  the  outside  edge  of  the  strip  will  be 
even  with  the  outer  face  of  the  leg.  Put  one  between 
the  last  two  along  the  back,  having  its  back  edge  even 
with  the  inner  face  of  the  rear  legs,  and  put  the  two 
short  ones  on  the  partitions  dividing  the  three  upper 
compartments,  each  edge  having  an  equal  projection. 
Remove  the  cover  of  the  raisin  box  and  fit  it  between  the 
rear  facing  strips,  cutting  it  down  in  width  and  length, 
if  necessary.  Nail  it  in  place,  keeping  its  rear  face  even 


with  the  rear 
tended  facing 
nail  the  shelves 
move  the  cover 
box.  Put  the 
place  and  screw 
knob  at  the 
front  f a<ie.  Fas- 
on  the  lower 
place  the  mir- 
dle  space  be- 
pieces,  and  se- 
with  glazier's 
headed  tacks, 
small  and  two' 
the  high  frame 


face  of  the  ex- 
strips.  Fit  and 
in  place  and  re- 
from  the  cigar 
cigar  box  in 
the  small  brass 
center  of  its 
ten  the  antlers 
crosspiece  and 
ror  in  the  mid- 
tween  the  cross- 
cure  it  in  place 
points  or  large- 
The  other  two 
large  spaces  in 
are  left  open. 


280 


BOX  FURNITURE 


BOY'S  DELIGHT 


Illustration  98 


Figure  1 


An  adaptation  of  the  "Silverette"  and  a  portion  of 
the  Umbrella-  and  Overshoe-Stand  combined,  and  is  de- 
signed to  hold  the  numerous  trinkets  that  delight  the  boy. 

Requirements : 

Body.  8  Herring  Boxes  (about  5  in.  deep,  15  in.  wide,  15%  in. 
long). 

Cover  Lids.     Made  from  the  covers  removed  from  the  boxes. 

Corner  Legs.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  48  in.  long. 
4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  48  in.  long. 

Facing  Strip  Legs.     4  Strips  l/2  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  48  in.  long. 

Facing  Strips.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  5  in.  wide,  14%  in.  long. 
4  Strips  y2  in.  thick,  5  in.  wide,  15  in.  long. 

Hardware.  4  1%  in.  brass  hinges  (butts)  and  screws.  2  pull- 
knobs. 


Construction : 

Make  the  corner  and  the  facing  strip  legs  48  inches 
long.    Remove  the  covers  from  all  the  boxes.    Place  one 


BOX  FURNITURE  281 

of  the  boxes  on  its  side  on  the  floor,  and  upon  it  set  an- 
other box  on  its  side,  with  both  open  compartments  fac- 
ing the  same  way.  Match  their  edges  and  join  them  by 
nailing  the  abutting  sides  together.  Upon  this  second 
box  place  a  third  one  on  its  side  and  join  them  in  a  simi- 
lar manner,  being  careful  that  when  joined  they  are  in 
a  straight  line.  With  three  more  boxes,  make  another 
set  in  the  same  manner.  Place  both  sets  on  their  sides, 
spaced  6  inches  apart,  the  open  top  of  one  set  facing  the 
closed  bottoms  of  the  other  set,  and  nail  a  corner  leg  on 
at  each  end,  allowing  the  legs  to  project  4  inches  over 
the  bottom  face  of  one  set.  Use  the  try-square  as  a  guide 
to  have  the  legs  at  right  angles  with  the  top  edge  of  the 
set  of  boxes.  Reverse  them  and  nail  the  corner  legs  on 
the  opposite  corners  and  set  the  piece  upon  its  legs. 
Nail  on  the  four  facing  strip  legs,  having  the  center  of 
the  strip  directly  over  the  box  joints.  Place  and  nail  the 
two  remaining  boxes  between  the  facing  strip  legs,  set- 
ting the  upper  edge  of  one  the  thickness  of  the  cover 
below  the  top  of  the  strips,  and  the  bottom  of  the  other 
6  inches  above  the  top  edge  of  the  upper  set  of  three. 
These  two  upper  boxes  in  the  middle  section  will  have 
covers  made  in  two  parts  hinged  together,  the  rear  part 
4  inches  wide,  to  be  nailed  on  the  rear  top  part  of  the 
box,  with  its  back  edge  even  with  the  rear  outside  face 
of  the  box.  Hang  the  wide  portion  of  the  cover  to  this 
narrow  portion  with  the  butts  or  hinges,  and  screw  on 
the  lifting  knob.  Put  the  wide  facing  strips  on  the 
inside  face  of  the  legs  between  the  corner  legs  and  the 
top  box,  both  front  and  rear,  and  between  the  corner  legs 
at  each  end.  The  upper  boxes  in  the  middle  section  may 
have  partitions  placed  in  them  as  desired. 


282 


BOX  FUENITUBE 


CLUB-ROOM  CORNER  SEAT 


Illustration  99 


Figure  1 


A  unique  Corner  Seat  made  by  the  author  for  the  club- 
room  at  Copenhagen  Settlement,  Denmark,  in  the  fall 
of  1907.  A  recent  letter  states  that  the  seat  has  been  in 
constant  use  and  is  as  strong  as  when  built.  It  consists 
of  two  packing-boxes  on  legs,  the  rear  edge  of  which  sup- 
ports a  paneled  back  upheld  at  each  end  by  a  pedestal. 
A  double-section  library,  filled  with  the  club  books, 
flanks  both  ends  of  the  seat,  the  pedestals  giving  a  sub- 
stantial end  finish  to  the  back. 

The  paneled  back  is  a  protection  to  the  wall,  and  upon 
its  face  were  hung  three  flat-back  cushions,  about  5 
inches  thick,  filled  with  the  shavings.  Each  shelf  in  the 
pedestals  holds  a  jar  of  water  from  which  trail  growing 
ivy  vines.  The  practical  and  artistic  effect  of  such  a 
combination  may  readily  be  imagined. 

The  seat  covers  are  loose  and  removable,  giving  easy 
access  to  the  compartments  beneath  them,  which  afford 
large  stowaway  facilities. 


BOX  FURNITURE  283 

Being  portable,  this  seat  may  easily  be  moved  to  an- 
other corner  if  necessary. 


Requirements : 

Seats.  1  Packing-box  (9%  in.  deep,  21  in.  wide,  40  in.  long).  1 
Packing-box  (9%  in.  deep,  21  in.  wide,  49  in.  long). 

Vine  Pedestal.  2  Special  Boxes  (7%  in.  square,  47  in.  long, 
and,  being  an  odd  size,  will  probably  have  to  be  made  from  the 
material  of  other  boxes). 

Oblong  Bookcases.  6  Small  Butter  Boxes  (8  in.  deep,  10  in. 
wide,  15  in.  long). 

Square  Bookcases.  2  Silk  Boxes  (7%  in.  deep,  7%  in.  wide,  35 
in.  long). 

Seat  Covers.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  21%  in.  wide,  40  in.  long. 
1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  21%  in.  wide,  49  in.  long. 

Square  Bookcase  Shelves.  6  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  the  width  and 
depth  of  the  inside  of  the  box. 

Vine  Pedestal  Shelves.  2  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  the  width  and 
depth  of  the  inside  of  the  box. 

False  Top.  4  Pieces  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  larger  each  way  than  the 
end  of  the  pedestal  boxes. 

Corner  Legs.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  18*4  in. 
long.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  18*4  in.  long. 

Facing  Strip  Legs.  10  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  18^4  in. 
long. 

Vine  Pedestal  Corner  Trim.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  %  in.  wide, 
the  length  equal  to  the  inside  length  of  the  box.  4  Strips  %  in. 
thick,  iy±  in.  wide,  the  length  equal  to  the  inside  length  of  the  box. 

Vine  Pedestal  Facing  Strips.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1*4  in. 
wide,  the  length  equal  to  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Square  Bookcase  Corner  Trim.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  %  in. 
wide,  the  length  equal  to  the  outside  length  of  the  box.  4  Strips  % 
in.  thick,  1*4  in.  wide,  the  length  equal  to  the  outside  length  of 
the  box. 

Square  Bookcase  Facing  Strips.  4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  %  in. 
wide,  the  length  equal  to  the  outside  length  of  the  box. 

Seat  Cleats.     5  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2%  in.  wide,  18%  in.  long. 


284  BOX  FUENITUEE 

Paneled  Back.  22  Strips  *4  in.  thick,  5  in.  wide,  about  29*4  in. 
long.  24  Strips  *4  in.  thick,  1  in.  wide,  about  26 ^  in.  long. 

Top  of  the  Back.  1  Strip  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  42  in.  long. 
1  Strip  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  72  in.  long. 

Construction : 

Make  two  corner  and  ten  facing  strip  legs  for  the  seat 
—one  corner  leg  and  six  facing  strip  legs  17^  inches 
long,  and  the  others  18^4  inches  long.  The  short  legs 
are  for  the  rear  of  the  seat,  and  when  nailed  in  place 
their  upper  ends  are  to  be  1  inch  below  the  top  edge  of 
the  seat  boxes.  The  sheathing  of  the  paneled  back  will 
project  1  inch  below  the  top  of  the  seat  boxes  and  will 
nail  to  them  in  the  rear,  while  the  lower  end  of  the  1-inch- 
wide  joint  strips  will  be  even  with  the  top  of  the  cover 
to  allow  the  cover  to  fit  under  them  and  against  the 
sheathing  forming  the  back. 

Remove  the  covers  from  all  of  the  boxes  except  the  vine 
pedestal  boxes.  Turn  the  shorter  seat  box  on  its  side  and 
nail  the  short  corner  leg,  1,  on  the  corner  which  is  to 
fit  in  the  corner  of  the  room.  On  the  same  end  of  the 
box,  but  at  the  other  corner,  put  a  short  facing  strip  leg, 
1,  allowing  it  to  project  one  half  its  width  over  the 
side.  When  the  seat  boxes  are  placed  together,  the  center 
of  this  leg  will  cover  the  joint.  Nail  the  long  leg,  2,  and 
the  short  leg,  3,  at  the  other  end,  having  their  outer  edges 
even  with  the  end  of  the  box.  Put  No.  4  (short)  leg 
half-way  between  No.  3  and  the  corner  leg,  having  all 
their  upper  ends  1  inch  below  the  top  of  the  box,  except 
No.  2,  which  will  be  even  with  the  top.  Turn  the  box 
on  its  side,  that  side  with  the  three  legs  being  on  the 
floor.  Nail  the  long  leg,  5,  and  the  short  leg,  6,  on 
the  longer  seat  box,  and  place  its  opposite  end  upon  the 


BOX  FUENITURE 


285 


upper  side  of  the  shorter  seat  box,  having  its  side  against 
the  overlapping  leg  on  the  end  of  the  shorter  seat  box. 
Match  their  edges  and  nail  them  together,  putting  corner 
leg,  2,  the  reverse  way  in  the  angle  formed  by  the  junc- 
tion of  the  boxes.  Turn  the  boxes  over  upon  the  legs 
and  nail  on  short  legs  7  and  9  and  long  legs  8  and  10, 
having  them  evenly  spaced  front  and  rear  between  the 
legs  at  the  end. 

Make  the  seat  covers  for  each  box  I~y2  inches  wider 
than  the  outside  width  of  the  box  and  of  the  same  length 
as  the  outside  length  of  the  box.  They  may  be  made 
with  either  two  or  three  widths  of  board,  with  cleats 
placed  on  the  under  side  about  4  inches  from  the  end, 
and  one  in  the  center  of  the  long  seat,  having  each  end 
of  the  cleats  I1/-?  inches  from  the  side  edges  of  the  cover. 
It  will  be  necessary  to  cut  y2  inch  off  the  front  edge  of 
the  shorter  cover  the  width  of  the  longer  cover,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  2.  Allow  the  front  edges  of  the  seats  to  be  even 
with  the  front  face  of  the  legs.  The  vine  pedestal  may 
be  without  ends,  made  of  four  pieces  of  equal  width  and 


* 


r 


'f  H' 


ii  i 

=R 


286  BOX  FUENITUEE 

length,  formed  as  described  for  the  Cast  Pedestal,  Illus- 
tration 3.  Fit  and  nail  the  shelf  inside  of  each  vine 
pedestal  box  8  inches  (or  at  a  suitable  depth  to  suit  the 
flower-pot  it  will  contain)  from  one  end,  which  will  be 
the  top  end.  Nail  the  corner  trim  A  on  two  corners  and 
the  facing  strips  B  on  the  sides  near  the  opposite  corners, 
as  shown  in  Fig.  2,  having  the  facing  strips  overlapping 
or  projecting  one  half  their  width  over  the  corners  of  the 
box.  Fit  and  nail  the  shelves  in  the  square  bookcase 
boxes,  spacing  them  to  suit  the  books  they  will  contain; 
or,  if  preferable,  made  like  the  illustration,  the  heights 
of  the  compartments,  named  from  the  bottom  up,  would 
be  about  10  inches,  8  inches,  7  inches,  and  7  inches.  Put 
on  the  corner  trim  and  facing  strips  the  same  as  described 
above  for  the  vine  pedestal. 

Remove  one  side  from  each  of  two  of  the  oblong  book- 
case boxes.  Turn  the  square  bookcase  open  side  down 
on  the  floor  and  place  one  of  the  remaining  boxes  on  its 
end  upon  it  between  the  projecting  facing  strips,  having 
one  side  of  the  box  even  with  one  end  of  the  square  book- 
case, and  nail  or  screw  them  together.  Place  one  of  the 
boxes  with  the  side  removed  on  its  end  also  upon  the 
square  case,  having  its  open  side  edges  against  the  side 
of  the  first  box.  Place  the  other  open  side  box  on  the 
square  case  in  a  similar  manner  against  the  last  box  and 
nail  them  together,  having  all  their  open  compartments 
facing  the  same  way.  Lay  the  vine  pedestal  on  the  floor 
with  the  projecting  facing  strips  facing  up,  and  place  the 
two  bookcases  upon  it,  with  the  square  bookcase  also  fac- 
ing up,  having  the  lower  side  of  the  bookcase  even  with 
the  end  of  the  vine  pedestal,  and  nail  them  together. 
Stand  the  three  joined  pieces  right  end  up  and  nail  a  top 


BOX  FURNITUEE  287 

on  the  square  bookcase  and  also  the  vine  pedestal,  allow- 
ing it  to  project  1  inch  over  on  all  sides.  The  tops  for 
the  vine  pedestals  must  have  a  suitable  opening  cut  in 
them  to  admit  the  flower-pot  which  the  shelf  supports. 
The  openings  may  be  easily  cut  after  the  tops  are 
nailed  on. 

Construct  the  other  oblong  bookcase  from  the  remain- 
ing boxes  and  join  the  other  square  bookcase  and  pedes- 
tal to  it  in  the  same  manner.  The  open  side  of  the  oblong 
bookcase  will  face  to  the  left  in  one,  while  in  the  other  it 
will  face  to  the  right,  as  you  face  the  open  side  of  the 
square  bookcase.  Place  one  section  against  each  end  of 
the  corner  seat  and  nail  or  screw  them  firmly  together. 

Select  a  strip  having  a  straight  edge  and  not  less  than 
6  feet  long.  Lay  it  on  the  floor  and  tack  it  with  nails 
driven  two  thirds  down.  Lay  one  of  the  5-inch-wide 
sheathing  strips  which  form  the  back  also  on  the  floor, 
at  right  angles  to  and  near  the  end  of  the  first  strip,  and 
tack  it  also.  Place  another  sheathing  strip  against  this, 
and  over  the  joint  formed  by  their  abutting  sides  nail  a 
1-inch-wide  joint  strip,  and  continue  to  lay  the  sheathing, 
placing  and  nailing  a  joint  strip  over  each  joint,  until  14 
sheathing  strips  are  thus  joined  together,  having  the  end 
of  each  joint  and  sheathing  strip  against  the  first  strip 
tacked  to  the  floor.  Use  nails  not  more  than  %  inch 
longer  than  the  thickness  of  both  strips,  otherwise  the 
back  will  be  nailed  to  the  floor  and  cannot  easily  be  re- 
leased. This  forms  the  long  side  of  the  back.  Remove  it, 
and  with  the  remaining  strips  make  the  other  side  in  a 
similar  manner.  Place  them  in  position,  at  the  back  of 
the  seat  boxes,  with  the  lower  edge  of  the  sheathing  rest- 
ing on  the  top  of  the  legs  and  the  lower  end  of  the  joint 


288  BOX  FURNITURE 

strips  on  top  of  the  cover,  one  end  being  against  the 
corner  trim  of  the  vine  pedestal  and  the  other  end  even 
with  the  outside  corner  face  of  the  box,  and  screw  it 
through  the  sheathing  into  the  seat  boxes.  Put  on  the 
other  portion  of  the  back  in  a  similar  way,  joining  their 
ends  to  the  corner  trim  of  the  vine  pedestals  with  joint 
strips  nailed  to  each,  and  their  ends  in  the  corner  nailed 
through  the  side  of  one  into  the  edge  of  the  other  and 
joined  with  the  joint  strips  also.  Fit  and  nail  the  2-inch- 
wide  top  strip  placed  on  its  flat  side  on  the  top  of  each 
side,  allowing  it  to  project  1  inch  over  the  face  of  the 
joint  strips.  The  seat,  now  being  complete,  may  be 
moved  bodily  into  the  corner  awaiting  it. 


BOX  FURNITURE 


289 


COMBINATION  DESK.  READING-TABLE 
AND  BOOKCASE 

Illustration  100  Figures  1  ana 


This  article  of  furniture  was  made  by  the  author  to 
meet  the  requirements  of  the  \vinter  manager  of  a  coal- 
mine located  in  the  arctic  region.  He  said:  "Our  space 
is  very  limited.  We  need  something  to  serve  as  a  writing- 
desk,  with  ample  stationery  closets,  book-shelves  for  our 
library,  magazines,  and  newspapers,  that  can  be  used  as 
a  reading-table  and  support  a  light  which  our  cat,  who 
has  a  fondness  for  lamps,  cannot  overturn  during  our 
three  months'  period  of  total  darkness." 

This  is  much  simpler  to  make  than  one  would  imagine, 
so  study  it  carefully. 

19 


290  BOX  FURNITURE 

Requirements  : 

Body.  8  Condensed-milk  Boxes  (about  7*4  in.  deep,  13  in.  wide, 
19%  in.  long). 

Drawer.     1  Window-glass  Box  (26  in.  long). 

Shelves.     9  Pieces  made  from  the  covers  removed  from  boxes. 

Facing  Strips.  3  Strips  */>  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  26  in.  long.  2 
Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  38  in.  long.  5  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2 
in.  wide,  20  in.  long.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  the  length 
equal  to  the  distance  from  the  under  side  of  the  drawer  to  the  lower 
edge  of  the  desk. 

Legs.  4  Strips  i/o  in.  thick,  1%  in.  wide,  26  in.  long.  4  Strips 
y%  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  26  in.  long. 

Lamp  Bracket  Top.     4  Strips  y»  in.  thick,  10  in.  square. 

Lamp  Bracket  Legs.  6  Strips  %  in.  thick,  2  in.  wide,  12  in. 
long. 

Drawer  Slides.  2  Strips  %  in.  thick,  %  in.  wide,  the  length 
equal  to  the  width  of  the  drawer. 

Door  Cleats.     4  Strips  %  in.  thick,  1%  in-  wide,  10  in.  long. 

Top.  1  Piece  %  in.  thick,  3  in.  wider  than  the  outside  depth 
with  cover  on,  and  twice  the  outside  depth  with  cover  removed, 
and  3  in.  longer  than  four  times  the  outside  width  of  the  box. 

Hardware.     4  tee  hinges.     4  pull-knobs. 


Construction : 

Make  the  six  corner  legs  26  inches  long.  Remove  the 
covers  carefully  from  six  of  the  boxes  and  one  side  from 
each  of  the  other  two.  In  four  of  the  boxes,  10  inches, 
from  one  end,  fit  a  shelf  the  full  depth  of  the  box  and 
fasten  the  shelves  in  with  1%  inch  brads,  driven  through 
the  sides  and  bottom  of  the  box  into  the  edges  of  the 
shelves.  These  four  boxes  form  the  library  portion,  as 
shown  by  Fig.  2.  Take  one  of  the  four  and  turn  it  on  its 
side,  then  place  another  sidewise  upon  the  first,  match 
their  edges,  and  nail  the  boxes  together  by  driving 
through  their  sides.  Place  another  box  on  its  side  upon 


BOX  FURNITURE  291 

the  second  one,  then  the  fourth  box  upon  the  third,  join- 
ing them  all  as  the  first  two,  taking  care  that  all  open 
sides  face  alike  and  that  like  compartments  are  kept  in 
line.  Lay  all  four  boxes  down  as  one,  upon  their  bot- 
toms. Nail  a  corner  leg  at  the  open  side  corner  of  each 
end  box,  keeping  the  upper  end  of  the  leg  even  with  that 
end  of  the  boxes  which  has  the  smaller  compartment. 
Turn  them  all  upside  down  and  they  will  all  stand  bot- 
tom up.  On  each  end  box  place  upon  its  flat  side  one  of 
the  boxes  from  which  you  removed  the  side,  so  that  the 
remaining  closed  sides  will  face  each  other.  Match  them 
to  the  boxes  upon  which  they  rest,  and  get  all  the  edges 
even  and  nail  them  to  the  end  boxes.  Upon  the  boxes  last 
added,  place  the  other  two  boxes,  one  upon  each,  open 
side  up,  and  nail  them  to  the  others.  There  is  now  a 
pile  of  boxes  three  high  at  each  end,  lying  flat  sides 
down.  While  they  lie  in  this  position,  fit  the  shelves  in 
the  two  top  boxes  just  added,  spacing  them  to  suit  the 
material  they  are  to  contain.  Fasten  the  shelves  with 
li/o  inch  brads  driven  through  the  sides  of  the  boxes 
into  the  edges  of  the  shelves.  Put  on  the  corner  legs,  ons 
011  each  outer  corner,  and  nail  a  facing  strip,  or  inter- 
mediate leg,  on  each  opposite  corner,  having  the  inner 
edge  of  the  facing  strips  even  with  the  outside  face  of 
the  box.  Between  these  facing  strips  will  be  fitted  the 
drawer.  Fit  the  doors  in  place  between  the  legs  and  fac- 
ing strips  just  added,  then  put  the  cleats  on  the  doors 
near  the  top  and  bottom,  placed  so  they  will  clear  the 
shelves  when  the  doors  close.  Put  the  hinges  on,  keeping 
the  middle  of  the  hinge  about  4  inches  from  each  end  of 
the  door.  Hang  the  doors  so  they  will  open  one  right  and 
the  other  left  hand.  Screw  the  knobs  on  the  doors  6 


292  BOX  FURNITURE 

inches  down  from  the  top  of  the  door  and  2  inches  from 
the  edge.  Turn  the  whole  piece  over  and  stand  it  upon 
its  legs.  Nail  on  the  three  facing  strips  which  cover  the 
joints  of  the  boxes  and  also  act  as  intermediate  legs,  two 
of  which  form  part  of  the  lamp  bracket.  Remove  one 
side  from  the  window-glass  box,  and,  if  the  box  is  not 
the  proper  length  to  fit  in  the  recess,  set  the  end  in  and 
shorten  it  and  fit  it  in  place.  Nail  the  slides  on  the  body 
at  both  sides  of  recess  directly  under  the  ends  of  the 
drawer,  keeping  the  upper  edge  of  the  drawer  even  with 
the  top  of  the  facing  strips.  Push  the  drawer  in  until 
its  front  face  is  even  with  the  face  of  the  facing  strips. 
Nail  a  small  block  behind  it  on  each  side  for  a  stop. 
Place  such  partitions  in  the  drawer  as  you  may  wish, 
and  screw  on  the  knobs  4  inches  from  each  end  and  at 
the  center  vertically.  Nail  on  the  seven  remaining  facing 
strips  which  cover  the  box  joints  only,  two  at  each  outer 
end  and  three  in  the  recess.  The  two  end  ones  in  the 
recess  will  extend  from  the  under  side  of  the  drawer  slide 
to  the  lower  edge  of  the  body.  Put  on  the  top,  allowing  the 
edges  to  project  1  inch  over  the  outside  face  of  the  legs 
all  around.  Cut  the  edge  of  the  top  on  the  library  side 
V/2  inches  deep  and  2  inches  wide  to  admit  the  two 
facing  strips  which  form  a  part  of  the  lamp  support,  and 
nail  the  cover  on.  Fit  and  nail  two  pieces  2  inches  long, 
1  inch  wide,  and  %  inch  thick  to  fit  the  cut  outside  the 
lamp  bracket  facing  strips.  Place  two  of  the  10-inch- 
square  lamp  bracket  tops  on  the  bench,  flat  sides  down, 
.with  the  grain  of  the  wood  of  one  at  right  angles  with 
the  other,  and  glue  and  clamp  them  together,  holding 
them  tightly  for  twenty-four  hours.  Measure  the  lamp 
and  cut  a  hole  with  the  keyhole-saw  the  proper  diameter 


BOX  FURNITURE 


293 


to  suit  the  lamp,  the  center  of  the  hole  being  in  the 
center  of  the  top.  Smooth  the  edges  of  the  hole  with 
sandpaper  and  cut  the  bracket  legs  so  they  stand  above  the 
main  top  exactly  the  same  distance  as  does  the  facing  strip. 
Place  the  bracket  top  upon  the  facing  strip,  keeping  the 
edge  even  with  the  outer  face  of  the  strip  and  projecting 
equally  on  each  side,  and  nail  it  with  two  long  brads  to 
the  top  end  of  the  strip.  Place  a  leg  under  the  opposite 
side  and  set  and  nail  it  in  the  same  way.  Do  the  same 
with  the  other  two  legs.  While  keeping  all  the  legs  per- 
fectly straight  or  plumb,  nail  them  at  the  bottom  ends. 
Use  an  awl  to  start  the  holes  and  toe  the  brads  in,  using 
114  inch  brads.  Repeat  this  for  the  other  lamp  bracket. 
Doors  may  be  hung  for  the  end  compartments  if  pre- 
ferred. 


a  Corner  of  tbe  Copenhagen 
Club-room 

GAME-TABLE  CLUB-ROOM  STOOLS 

CLUB-ROOM  CORNER  S1LAT 
BRANCH  PEDESTAL      COPENHAGEN  SIDEBOARD 

Color  Scheme: 
Flemish  oak. 
Yellow. 

Woodwork: 

Flemish  oak  (paint). 

Furniture: 

Flemish  oak  (stain). 

Walls : 

Yellow. 

Ceiling : 

Yellow  of  a  lighter  shade. 

Corner-seat  Pillows: 
Olive-green  burlap. 

China: 

White,  with  green  and  yellow  design. 

Floor: 

Flemish  oak  (stained). 

Plants: 

Vines,  growing  plants,  and  cut  flcwers  with  yellow 
blossoms. 


library  or  Stub? 

TWO  SMALL  500- VOLUME  BOOKCASES 
CAST  PEDESTAL        FOOTSTOOL 

COMBINATION  DESK, 
READING-TABLE  AND  BOOKCASE 

Color  Scheme: 
Black. 
Moss  green. 

Woodwork  : 

Black  paint. 

Furn  iture : 

Black  paint. 

Walls: 

Moss  green. 

Ceiling: 

Green,  in  lighter  tone  than  the  walls. 

Hangings  and  Pilloics: 

Plain   green   burlap    or   canvas,    or   with   motif   ap- 
pliqued  in  black  and  gold. 

Curtains: 

Cream-colored  muslin. 

Floor: 

Black  paint,  with  large  green  rug. 

Plants: 

Growing  palms,  and  plants  with  either  red,  yellow, 
or  white  blossoms. 


rs 


The  First  Process  in  the  Construction  of  the  Allendale  Sideboard 

r 


The  Tool-chest,  given  to  the  Author  by  One  Hundred  Friends 


The  Rough  Material  Arr 


298 


The  Spitzbergen  Sideboard  and  Hall  Stand 


Combination  Desk,  Reading-table,  and  Bookcase, 
Rear  View 


The  Game-table  in  the  Club-room  of  the  Copenhagen  Settlement 


The  China-closet 


301 


The  ' l  Dresserette, ' '  Opened 


The  Upright  Clock 


The  Greek-cross  Tea-table,  Opened 


The  Greek-cross  Tea-table 
Closed 


The  ' '  Shavingette, ' ' 
Closed 


The  Office  Washstand,  Opened 


303 


304 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 

LOAN  DEPT. 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below, 
or  on  the  date  to  which  renewed.  Renewals  only: 

Tel.  No.  642-3405 

Renewals  may  be  made  4  days  prior  to  date  due. 
Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 


REC'D  LD  MAY  8    71 -5PM  7  7 

ill  9 1996 


iaro 


RE 


(P2001slO)476 — A-32 


General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


YB   15324 

GENERAL  LIBRARY -U.C.  BERKELEY 

1I11MI1 

BOD070170M 


